JP7374859B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

A gaming machine capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and a notification display notifying that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a predetermined amount. known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-17403 Publication

The gaming machine uses specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed in various displays such as an award amount display and a notification display. Furthermore, the gaming machine displays background images corresponding to various states such as advantageous states, for example. There is room for improvement in the relationship between such specific characters and background images.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably display a display including specific characters in relation to a background image.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means having a display area capable of displaying an image and capable of displaying a display image of game-related information regarding the progress of the game in the display area;
a storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means having a plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers; ,
a variable winning means that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
a control means capable of executing a round game that changes the variable winning means to the first state;
Equipped with
The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area,
The display means is
A background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area,
In the second display area, an amount display regarding the amount of the gaming value provided can be displayed on the front side of the background image,
At least in the first display area, a notification display is displayed on the front side of the background image to notify that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a predetermined amount. A first notification display notifying that the amount of game value awarded has reached a second predetermined amount can be displayed;
The notification display can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area,
The award amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state,
The notification display ends displaying when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display,
The characters used for the notification display are larger in size than the characters used for the provision amount display,
The characters used for the provision amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed,
The specific character used to display the amount of application is such that the background image is not visible from the specific area,
The specific characters used for the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area,
The display means is
When the round game is played, displaying the award amount display after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state;
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that no gaming value has been awarded can be displayed at the start of the award amount display;
If the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a special display different from the predetermined display can be displayed at the start of the award amount display;
The predetermined period is a period that is less than or equal to the period from when a game medium is fired until the next game medium is fired;
It is characterized by
The gaming machine of Means 1 is a gaming machine that can perform a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.). ), has a display area that can display images, and has a display area that can display game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, the number of reserved 1st special symbols, the number of reserved 2nd special symbols, and the number of reserved symbols in the display area than decorative patterns). a display means capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5); A storage means (e.g., CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or background image) to be displayed in the area and a display image of the game-related information; It has a plurality of display layers that can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc. shown in FIG. 16-5), and an image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and combining images arranged in a plurality of display layers; A performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIGS. 16-17) capable of executing the performance to be displayed, and the display area of the display means is a first display area. area, and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51, a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), and the display means includes the first display area and the second display area (For example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.) (for example, the image display device 5 can display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value awarded on the front side of the background image in the second display area). In the area 20SH52, an acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls can be displayed on the front side of the background image, etc.), and at least in the first display area, a gaming value can be displayed on the front side of the background image. The first notification display notifies that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount, and the second notification display that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display a second notification display to notify that the predetermined amount has been reached (for example, in at least the first display area 20SH51, the image display device 5 can display a second notification display that is given in the jackpot game state on the front side of the background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. As the acquired number notification display 20SHKH, which informs that the number of prize balls awarded has reached the number of "Kiriban", when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it will be displayed as "1000 over". It is possible to display an acquisition number notification display, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches ``2000 balls,'' it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying ``2000 over,'' etc.), The notification display can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52). The award amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK is when the game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state). (for example, the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH is updated every time a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the display), and the notification display ends when a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH is updated every time a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the display). (for example, the characters used for the acquisition amount notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used for the award amount display). , the characters used for the acquisition amount display 20SHK are larger in size, etc.), and the characters used for the award amount display and the notification display form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. Contains a specific character (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed), and the award amount display The specific characters used for the background image are not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area), The specific characters used in the notification display indicate that the background video is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH indicate that the background video is visible from the specific area), The storage means changes the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area from a first position (for example, in the case of characteristic part 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. can store display position displacement information for displacing to a different second position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, the CGROM 205 can store display position displacement information (a portion in which image data for the image for use is stored), the image processing means generates a displacement specific image by displacing the specific image placed on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-23, a displacement target image is created by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, By applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R are moved upward as display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance, (a part that creates an image in which the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward), the effect executing means is configured to create a specific effect that displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display. (For example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG), and the display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer where the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than in the specific display layer. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are the portions that are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority.) It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, a display including a specific character can be suitably displayed in relation to a background image. Further, the notification display is easily noticed by the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount. In addition, a displacement specific image in which at least a part of a specific image displayed in a predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in a specific effect. A specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data than when image data of a specific image is exclusively stored. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from decreasing when a specific performance is executed.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, an image displayed on an image display device (display means) is broken at a specific timing such as during a reach effect during variable display, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-141396. There was something that could perform a scattering effect (specific effect). However, in such gaming machines, the effect is simply that the image breaks and scatters, so it is possible to improve the effect by performing the effect while other images are being displayed on the image display device. However, in this case, dedicated image data must be created for each image displayed on the image display device to execute the effect, and the amount of data to be stored in the storage means would be limited. There is a problem that the size may become excessively large, and in view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the amount of data stored in the storage means in order to execute a specific performance.

The gaming machine of means 2 is a gaming machine that can perform variable display (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine), has a display area that can display images, and has a display area that displays a game related to the progress of the game. Display images (for example, first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) of related information (for example, the first special figure pending memory number, the second special figure pending memory number, and small symbols whose display area is smaller than the decorative symbols) a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying the above, and storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information. storage means (e.g., CGROM 205) and a plurality of display layers (e.g., layer 1 image drawing area, layer 2 image drawing area, layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 16-5) in which images based on the image data can be placed. area, displacement image creation area, display image creation area, etc.), and is capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (e.g. , display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210), and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display performance process shown in FIGS. 16-17). portion), and the storage means sets the display position of at least a portion of the specific image in the display area to a first position (for example, in the case of a characteristic portion 006SG, a central portion of the display area of the image display device 5). ) to a second position different from the first position (for example, in the case of characteristic portion 006SG, a position above or below the display area of the image display device 5) can be stored. (For example, the CGROM 205 stores displacement image data), and the image processing means displaces the specific image arranged in the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information. (For example, as shown in Figure 16-23, by superimposing the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, By creating a displacement target image and applying a displacement image to the displacement target image, the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R are displayed as the display images on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. (a part that creates an image in which the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves upward and moves downward), the effect executing means is configured to perform the above-mentioned movement while variably displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG) to be displayed in the display area, and the display image of the game-related information is such that the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer. (For example, as shown in Figure 16-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are placed in the layer 1 image drawing area with the highest image display priority. (portion that is drawn).
According to this feature, a displacement specific image in which at least a portion of a specific image displayed in a predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect. Therefore, compared to the case where the image data of these displacement specific images is exclusively stored, the specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from decreasing when a specific performance is executed.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a diagram showing an example of lighting of a game effect lamp. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various display processes. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a diagram showing an example of a state in which game balls are caught between special variable prize winning ball devices. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various display processes. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. It is a figure which shows the background art related to the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions, etc. in the first form of the characteristic section 20SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the feature section 20SH. It is a figure which shows the example of the performance operation of the acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the acquisition number notification display in the 2nd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the result display in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance period of various performances in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the performance operation example of various performances in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion by the ending background image in the 3rd form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the background art related to the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the remaining count display in the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the Arabic numeral used for the remaining number notification display in the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing how the remaining number of times display is displayed in a fourth form of the feature section 20SH. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic section 20SH. It is a figure which shows the example of the performance operation of the remaining number of times display and remaining number of times notification display in the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement when winning a prize occurs during the round in the characteristic part 19SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the feature section 19SH. It is a figure showing an example of presentation operation when over winning occurs in characteristic part 19SH. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the feature section 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion by the over winning effect in the characteristic part 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance operation in the case where there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred in the feature section 19SH. It is a diagram showing another example of the performance operation in the case where there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred in the feature section 19SH. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in an effect control board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of generation of a displacement image when a displacement image is applied to a displacement target image. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of application of a displacement image to a displacement target image. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display image processing processing. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a generated image and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in a normal state, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of development suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of development suggestion production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in the development suggestion performance. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach suggestion production in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach suggestion production in a modification. It is an explanatory view of an image generated in a reach suggestion performance in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of the revival performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of the revival performance in a modification. It is an explanatory view of an image generated in a revival performance in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the display color of a crack effect image in a revival effect in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the pre-read preview performance in a modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a prefetch preview effect in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-read preview performance in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the change pattern of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-read preview performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the promotion performance in a modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a promotion effect in a modified example. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an image generated in a modification and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the promotion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the promotion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the temporary stop suggestion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the temporary stop suggestion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the temporary stop notification performance in a modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification in a modified example. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of displaying a stereoscopic image in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of the preview performance during a variable display, and development suggestion performance in a modification. It is an explanatory view when the present invention is applied to a slot machine in a modified example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is comprised of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), etc., and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. As shown, the frame lamp 9b includes a lower left lamp 9bL1 at the lower left portion, an upper left lamp 9bL2 at the upper left portion, a lower right lamp 9bR1 at the lower right portion, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 at the upper right portion. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. Further, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speaker portions 8L and 8R, respectively. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left display device lower lamp 9fL and a right side display device lower lamp 9fR. There is. In addition, a general winning a prize opening vicinity lamp 9g is provided in the vicinity of the general winning a prize opening 10 provided at three locations on the lower left side of the gaming area.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, the display device lower lamp 9f, and the general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. There is. In addition, these main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamps 9f, and general winning opening vicinity lamps 9g are configured to include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is based on the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the jackpot game state, a so-called right-handed hit may be performed in which the game ball is fired into the right-hand gaming area so that the game ball enters the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the setting value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 using a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios may be "0%" and the other ratio may be "100%" or a ratio less than "100%."

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of won balls after a predetermined period after the attacker becomes open in the first round game, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period. If there is no increase, a predetermined display is made to show that the number of acquired balls has not increased, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is made. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK having such features will be described below. Note that the description of the same parts as those explained in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g, which are lighting examples when all the game effect lamps 9 are turned on. It is a diagram. The characteristic parts 042AK of this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, include a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are lit sequentially from the lower left to the lower right. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player that he should play to the right.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), a performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042 AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 042AKS002, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the process of step 042 AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the winning start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the winning start specifying command is stored in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer. It should be stored in . Thereafter, the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS004). Also, settings are made to end the variable probability state and time saving state (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, processing to clear the probability variation flag and time saving flag to turn them off, processing to clear the special symbol variation number counter for counting the number of executions of the special symbol game in the probability variation state and time saving state, etc. It is enough if it is executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (step 042 AKS006), the special symbol stop process is ended.

If the jackpot flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), a production waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the performance waiting time at the start of the small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the process of step 042AKS008, similar to the process of step 042AKS003, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS009). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is the value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step 042AKS011).

Also, if the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). . After executing either of the processes in step 042AKS011 or step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to end the variable probability state or time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure variation counter (special figure variation count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, so that the updated special figure variation count value becomes a predetermined value. A determination is made as to whether or not it matches the special gaming state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the variable probability state and the time saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state by clearing the variable probability flag and the time saving flag and turning them off. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, it is sufficient to maintain the state of the probability change flag and the time saving flag and terminate the process of step 042AKS013. After executing the end determination of such probability change state and time saving state, the special symbol stop processing ends. In addition, the end determination based on the count value of the number of special symbol variations may be performed only in the time saving state, and in the variable probability state, it may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot". . Alternatively, for example, the variable state is terminated by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the end of the variable state from a random counter provided in the RAM 102, and referring to a table for determining the end of the variable state stored in advance in the ROM 101, etc. Alternatively, a determination may be made as to whether or not to do so.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot release pre-process. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot start time flag is on (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start time flag is set to the on state in response to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start performance is on standby (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. Set in the gaming control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapse determination value (for example, "0", etc.), it is determined that the jackpot start performance is on standby. , in response to a match, it may be determined that the jackpot start performance is not on standby.

If in step 042AKS022 the game is waiting for the performance at the start of the jackpot (step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating the game control process timer value by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), the jackpot release pre-processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 042AKS022 that the jackpot start time performance is not on standby (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), and the number of times the jackpot opening opening counter is cleared. (Step 042AKS025), reads the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 (Step 042AKS026), and sets an opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value. In the characteristic section 042AK of the present embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type, but for example, if there is a jackpot type of "suddenly certain", a jackpot of "probable variable" or "non-probable variable" is set. It is only necessary to set an open control pattern different from the type. In addition, even if the jackpot type is "probable variable" or "non-probable variable," for example, different release control patterns are set for the jackpot types of "probable variable 1" and "probable variable 2." It may be set to a pattern.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the player is waiting until the big prize opening is opened in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether the game control process timer value matches the next release waiting end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the next release is waiting. For example, it may be determined that the device is not waiting for the next release. If the game is waiting for the next release at step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), the process advances to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. The game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the next opening is not on standby (step 042AKS027; No), the grand prize opening is opened in accordance with the set opening control pattern and the count value in the grand prize opening number counter. Settings are made for this purpose (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the opening time of the big winning hole is set in the game control process timer, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a big winning prize. The grand prize opening time which is the upper limit of the time for which the mouth is kept open is set. In addition, for example, by starting outputting a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined large winning opening door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening door solenoid is turned on to open the large winning opening. Settings are made to set the status.

At this time, for example, regardless of whether the count value in the grand prize opening number counter is "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the grand prize opening opening time is set by the game control process timer. is set to

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a large prize opening designation command to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special drawing process flag is set to the value corresponding to the jackpot opening process. After updating to 5'' (step 042AKS031), the pre-processing for opening the big prize opening ends.

FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot opening process. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the jackpot by, for example, determining whether the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). If the game ball does not enter the big prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening at step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it, and the game ball enters the grand prize opening. A setting is made to transmit a winning designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated number-of-winnings count value has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value does not reach the predetermined number (Step 042AKS043; No), after decrementing the game control process timer value by 1 and updating it (Step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened, depending on whether or not the timer value has been met (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the process during opening of the big winning hole is ended.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated number of winnings count value has reached a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened in step 042AKS045. If it is determined that (Step 042AKS043; Yes), for example, by stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the predetermined large winning hole door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning hole is closed. The solenoid for the big prize opening door is set to be turned off (step 042AKS046), and the winning prize count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, settings are made to send a command after opening the big winning hole to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special drawing process flag is set after opening the big winning hole. After updating to "6" which is the value corresponding to the process (step 042AKS049), the jackpot opening process is ended.

In this way, the special symbol stopping process shown in Figure 10-2, the jackpot opening process shown in Figure 10-3, the jackpot opening process shown in Figure 10-4, etc. (including the jackpot opening process, jackpot end process, etc.) By being executed, the transmission setting of various production control commands such as a winning start designation command, a big winning hole opening designation command, a winning designation command, and a big winning hole after opening designation command is performed. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. , grasps the timing such as the start of the jackpot, opening of the jackpot (start of round) and closing (end of round), entry into the jackpot, end of jackpot, etc.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the jackpot production processing of step S176 in FIG. 9 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-5, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a winning end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051). The winning end designation command is executed on the main board when it is determined in the jackpot release post-processing in step S116 in FIG. This is a command sent from the 11 side, and is a command for ending the jackpot performance and executing the ending performance.

If it is determined that the winning end designation command has not been received (step 042 AKS051; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed since starting the nth R (nR predetermined period elapsed). Determination is made (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and the initial value is set to "1" and is sequentially incremented by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, which will be described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, and is set as a timer value at the start of the round game, and it may be determined that the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the nRth round when the timer value becomes "0". More specifically, in response to the fact that the grand prize opening has become completely open (that is, it has been detected that the grand prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open), from the main board 11 side. A command for specifying that the big prize opening is open is transmitted, and counting of the timer value for a predetermined period may be started from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the round game of the first round has started, the number of acquired balls display that is the display of the number of balls acquired and the round number that indicates the number of rounds is displayed. Display is performed. On the production control board 12 side, during the period from when a jackpot is reached to when it ends (period from fanfare to ending), each time a winning designation command indicating that a game ball has entered the jackpot is received, the number of wins is calculated. The process of adding 15 to . When the production control board 12 receives the winning designation command, it must first analyze the command, add up the number of wins, and display the added number of wins. It takes a predetermined period of time to display the information. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processing will not be completed in time for winnings from the start of the first round round game until the elapse of the predetermined period, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of wins. , even if a player has won a prize, the process of displaying "0015" may not be able to keep up ("0015" is displayed after "0000" is displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, 0.6 seconds is set as the predetermined period, and if the game ball that is present at the top of the grand prize opening at the opening timing wins a prize from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed. In addition, a period is ensured in which "0015" is directly displayed instead of "0000" being displayed as the number of acquisitions. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when firing continuously, and the period from firing until entering the big prize slot is set as 0.6 seconds. Even taking into consideration, the time interval required for the game balls that are continuously fired to enter the big winning hole is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening will be one from when the grand prize opening is opened until the number of winnings is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of wins from increasing in the state before displaying the number of wins or the number of rounds, causing the number of wins to be displayed at the timing when the number of rounds starts to be displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Although an example has been shown in which the predetermined period in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round or not. Determination is made (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, which is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and as described above, the initial value is set to "1" and is sequentially added by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, and is set to "1" in step 042AKS068. cleared. In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether n=1 by checking the value of n.

If it is determined that n=1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs a right-handed performance that suggests to the player that he should play right-handed, and also suggests that a jackpot gaming state has been reached. The operation of the fanfare performance is controlled (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, if it is determined that n≠1 (step 042AKS053; No), the production control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R and the number of acquisitions, and also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R. The operation of the jackpot performance is controlled (step 042AKS055). In the process of step 042AKS055, for example, when n=2, a round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of acquisitions are displayed, and the operation of the jackpot performance corresponding to the first round is controlled. In the process of step 042AKS055, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the grand prize opening (step 042AKS056). In addition, in the process of step 042AKS056, winnings are determined for a predetermined period after starting the nR. If the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the various display processes.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening within a predetermined period after starting the nth round (step 042AKS056; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 calculates the count value of the number of balls won. is added by "15" (step 042AKS057). Note that the count value of the number of acquired balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of acquired balls is continuously counted during the so-called consecutive games, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the end of the consecutive games. . After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the performance control CPU 120 causes the attacker lamp 9c to emit light and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). In addition, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is performed in a manner that is greater than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during the jackpot performance, for example. It emits light in a manner that notifies you of what has happened. Therefore, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved. In addition, regarding the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of times of light emission per unit time may be greater during the winning time and during the jackpot performance. In addition, when a game ball wins in the big prize opening, the winning sound is output in addition to making the attacker lamp 9c emit light, regardless of whether the prize is won within a predetermined period or not. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS058, the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round (first R), similarly to step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059 ). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are ended. On the other hand, if n≠1, that is, if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of acquired balls is displayed), and the number of acquired balls is displayed. After the updated display (step 042AKS060), various display processing ends. In addition, in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, when performing the update display of the number of acquired balls in the process of step 042AKS060, instead of displaying the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 as is, the count value of the number of acquired balls is displayed as shown in FIG. As shown in 12(a-23), a count-up display (display indicating that the number of acquisitions is increasing) is performed, and then the acquisition number is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of acquired balls will increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

If it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 that a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the nth R (step 042AKS052; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nth R and the number of acquisitions. At the same time, the operation control of the n-th jackpot performance is performed (step 042AKS061). When n=1, that is, when it is the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of wins is updated and displayed in step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the number of wins is incremented by 15 in step 042AKS057, so in step 042AKS061, ) As shown in Figure 10-11 (a-21), the number of wins has not increased in this jackpot after the count-up display (notification display that the number of wins has increased) is performed. Display the number of wins (display of "0015") that is different from the prescribed display (as a specific display) (if you are playing consecutive games, count the display of adding "15" to the number of wins from the previous jackpot) You can do this after uploading). On the other hand, if the game ball has not entered the jackpot before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in the current jackpot, so the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings does not increase in the current jackpot. -22), as a predetermined display, the number of wins is displayed (displaying "0000") to indicate that the number of wins has not increased (if you are playing consecutive games, the number of wins from the previous jackpot remains the same). display). In addition to "0000" as the acquisition number display (predetermined display) to indicate that the acquisition number has not increased, a non-numeric display such as "---" or "not increased" may be used. You can do it like this. Further, in step 042AKS061, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern according to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance. In this way, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of wins is not displayed, the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the grand prize opening. However, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, the effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 may be switched alternately. The display effect lamps 9 are turned on to emit more light than during a predetermined period. Therefore, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety. It is possible to liven up the performance and improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, since the performance effect lamp 9 is made to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the performance during the jackpot, the performance can be excited at once at the timing when the performance during the jackpot is executed, and the game interest can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the grand prize opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS063), The attacker playing card 9c emits light, outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning, displays a count-up display (notices that the winning number increases), and then displays the winning number to update the winning number. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the process of step 042AKS064, or if the winning designation command is not received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the n+1R, which is the next round after the nR, has started. It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, the determination may be made based on, for example, whether or not a large prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R has been received from the main board 11 side. If the (n+1)th R has not started, that is, if the grand prize opening designation command has not been received and the nth R remains (step 042 AKS065; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the various display processes as is. . On the other hand, when the n+1st R starts, that is, when the big prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R is received (step 042AKS065; Yes), n is added by "1" (step 042AKS066) and various display processing end. For example, if n=1, that is, the first round, n=2 in step 042AKS066. Note that although n=2 and this is the second round, until the predetermined period has elapsed, it is determined No in steps 042AKS052 and 053, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round, which is the n-1R. A round display is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (displayed in the process of step 042AKS061 after determining Yes in step 042AKS052).

If it is determined in step 042AKS051 that the winning end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to end the jackpot performance corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending performance (step 042AKS051; Yes). 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and ends various display processing.

Next, the display timing of displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of acquisitions, etc. and examples of performance operations will be specifically explained with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-14. In the illustrated example, the case is not during a consecutive game, but is a so-called first hit (first jackpot).

FIG. 10-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. FIGS. 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing display examples of performance operations, opening/closing states of the grand prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps on the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when the combination of decorative symbols constituting a jackpot is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game state is entered. At this stage, the grand prize opening is in a closed state as shown in FIG. 10-7 (b-1). In addition, in order to notify the player of the jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-1), a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable lamp 9d, a speaker lamp 9eL, Various performance effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower stage is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2.

When a jackpot is hit, as shown in Figure 10-6, a right-handed performance and a fanfare performance are performed to notify the player that they should play right-handed until the end of the predetermined period of the first round (Figure 10-6). 5, step 042AKS054). Note that the period from the jackpot to the start of the first round shown in FIG. 10-6 is a period that is sufficiently longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-2), All the production effect lamps 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in this order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center part, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and a right-hand hitting effect is performed in which "hitting right" is displayed in a large size on the image display device. Note that the small right-hitting display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2) may be continuously displayed during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed performance, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (a-3) to 10-10 (a-19), the image display device 5 displays the "right-handed hit" superimposed on the fanfare image. The display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the production effect lamps 9 will be explained below. When the right-handed performance starts, as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-3), the general winning hole vicinity lamp 9g provided at the lower left of the gaming area lights up first, and then the lamp 9g in the vicinity of the general winning hole lights up, as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-3). As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left portion, is lit. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-5), of the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left display device lower lamp 9fL lights up, and then As shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left portion, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L portion 9eL lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko game machine 1. Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7), since the grand prize opening is in a closed state, the ejected game media does not enter the grand prize opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7) shows an example in which the fired game ball passes through the second path in the upper part of the big prize opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided in the upper center portion of the game board 2 lights up, and as shown in FIG. ), when the main lamp 9 above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 lights up, the performance effect lamp 9 provided at the upper center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 lights up.

Next, as shown in Figure 10-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R part lights up, and then, as shown in Figure 10-8 (c-11), the frame lamp in the upper right part 9 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-12), among the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the right display device Lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right portion, lights up, and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. do. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1. As a result, the effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, then to the center part, and then from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the effect lamp 9 lights up the player's right hand. There will be a right-handed performance that suggests. In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which both the production effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 were used to suggest right-handed play. It may be. In addition, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 lights up from the lower left side to the center to the lower right side, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 lights up from the lower left side to the center and right side. Both may be turned on independently, simultaneously or with a time difference, such as in a downward direction.

After the right-handed performance on the performance effect lamps 9 is completed, all the performance effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the right-hitting display on the image display device 5 continues to be performed (the right-hitting effect itself is being executed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the opening timing of the big winning hole comes, the 1st R is started, and the big winning hole is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 continues, and until a predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16). As shown, all the production effect lamps 9 remain off (the same applies up to FIGS. 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all of the performance effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any one of the indicators such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set lower than usual. In addition, as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-16), even after the big prize opening is opened, until the predetermined period elapses, Figures 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 As shown in (c-13), the effect lamps 9 may be lit in sequence to suggest right-handed hitting. In this case, the lighting speed of each production effect lamp may be made faster than before the opening of the grand prize opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the changing speed may be made faster). In addition, when the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right-handed hit, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-15). It is also possible to leave the light on instead of turning it off. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big prize opening is in the open state.

Then, when the grand prize opening is completely opened as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-17), a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R is started, and as shown in Figure 10-10 As shown in (b-18), when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the production control board 12 side. In addition, for game balls that are fired due to a right-handed performance before the 1st round starts (before the grand prize opening is open) (game balls that are hit quickly), the grand prize opening will be in the open state. If it exists above the big winning opening at the timing when , it becomes possible to win within the predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R. On the side of the production control board 12, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18) through the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5, and the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). As shown in , the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize. As described above, the attacker lamp 9c emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during a jackpot performance, for example. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the fired game ball passes through the first route, which is the route in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning route where the count switch 23 is provided. An example is shown below. In addition, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present in the big winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game balls present above the grand prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period of time after the opening of the grand prize opening, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game without making him feel anxious. It can be prevented.

As shown in Figure 10-10 (b-18), after the game ball enters the big winning hole, or after the game ball enters the grand prize slot as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-17), time passes without winning, 10(a-19), (b-19), and (c-19), when the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the round number display and jackpot effect corresponding to the 1st R will be displayed as shown in FIG. 10-6. Since it is the execution timing and the acquisition number display execution timing, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-18), if the game ball enters the big winning hole before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20), A round number display of "1R" indicating one round is displayed, and a count-up display is also performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot effect (first R effect), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20). , and characters are displayed. Note that the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot displayed as the jackpot performance (first R performance) and the display of "BOUNUS in progress" are not shown (the same applies to Figures 10-20, which will be described later). As shown in 10-21, it is displayed in a manner suggesting that the ball should be hit to the right. Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or a right-handed performance is performed and a predetermined period of time has passed after the big winning opening is opened, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-1), as a jackpot performance, As shown in (A-2), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, is displayed facing forward, and is placed above "B" in the "BOUNUS" display. A star-shaped image is displayed. Next, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-3), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol that makes up the jackpot, is tilted toward the back right, and the "BOUNUS in progress" display changes to "7". A star-shaped image moves to the top of "O". Next, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-4), the "7" symbol that constitutes the jackpot faces forward, and a star appears above the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. Images of shapes shift. After that, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-5), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, becomes tilted toward the back left, and the "U" of the "BOUNUS in progress" display appears. A star-shaped image moves to the top of ``. Then, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-6), the "7" symbol, which is the decorative symbol that makes up the jackpot, faces forward again, and a star appears above the "S" in the "BOUNUS" display. The image of the shape shifts and returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, during the jackpot production, the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot move toward the back right, the front, and the back left, and a star-shaped image moves from the left character of the "BOUNUS" display to the right. By shifting the , it is suggested to the player that he should hit to the right. The motion display of the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot and the transition display of star-shaped images are called effect displays.In addition to this, effect displays include, for example, a predetermined image rotating clockwise, or a character gradually changing. This includes indications such as turning to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner that suggests right-handed hitting. According to this, the effect display suggests that the ball should be hit to the right, making it easier to recognize that the ball should be hit to the right.

In addition, during the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20), the performance effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern set in advance according to the jackpot performance. In this example, it is assumed that a light emitting pattern is set in which the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately turned on. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. In this way, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the production effect lamp 9 is not emitted until the grand prize opening is in the open state and a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is made to emit light after the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time passes without the game ball entering the grand prize opening, the count-up display will not be performed and the number of acquisitions will be displayed as "0000" as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-22). is displayed. In addition, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as a jackpot production (1st R production), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to a preset light emission pattern according to the effect during the jackpot are common regardless of whether a prize is won or not.

Next, as time passes and as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1st round, the upper limit to which the grand prize opening can be opened. period. In addition, in conjunction with the winning, the process of step 042AKS064 shown in Figure 10-5 is executed, a count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-23), and the count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-24). As shown in the figure, the number of acquisitions "0150" is displayed. In addition, with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), and in addition to lighting up the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the jackpot performance, ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize. In addition, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened, it is a sufficient period even if counted from the lapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the predetermined period has elapsed. Since the continuous firing interval is 0.6 seconds, this is a sufficient period for winning 10 prizes. Therefore, since sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

When the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1R, the maximum period in which the grand prize opening can be opened is reached. It is controlled to be in a closed state. After that, until the 2nd R shown in FIG. 10-6 starts, the big prize opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed (until the predetermined period has elapsed after n=2), the number of rounds corresponding to the first R is displayed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-25). , the jackpot effect continues to be performed (the display of the number of wins is updated according to the winnings), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the jackpot effect as shown in Figure 10-12 (c-25). and lights up.

In addition, when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1st round and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize opening is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball enters the grand prize opening. A so-called over-win may occur in which the player enters the grand prize opening after the 10th game ball. Even in the case of over-winning, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the number of wins of "0165" may be displayed. In this case, after the count-up display and the number of acquisitions are displayed according to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-win are displayed, but as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-25) As shown in , the count-up display and the number-of-wins display corresponding to the over-win are completed within the period from when the big winning opening is completely closed until before it becomes open state corresponding to the 2nd R. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize that an over-win has occurred in the first round, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, since the update of the number of wins displayed in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the number of wins displayed in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is difficult to determine which one is the winning number corresponding to the opening of the round. It becomes easier. Further, the winning sound corresponding to an over winning sound may be a sound different from a normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, if the count value exceeds the upper limit value of "10" and the winning is achieved, the over winning sound may be output. Further, the attacker lamp 9c may also be caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to an over-winning mode, unlike the light emission in a normal winning mode.

Then, in response to the second round, as shown in Figure 10-6, the big winning opening becomes open again, and as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-26), the big winning opening opens again. controlled to become In this case, it is determined Yes in step 042AKS065 of FIG. 10-5, that is, the big prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R is received, and the process of 042AKS066 is executed, so that n=2. Become. At this stage, the process of step 042AKS055 in Figure 10-5 is executed, so as shown in Figures 10-13 (a-26) and (c-26), the jackpot effect and the number of rounds corresponding to the 1R are shown. A display is made (see also Figure 10-6).

Next, when the grand prize opening is completely opened and the game ball enters the grand prize opening as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-27), unlike in the first round, the step shown in Figure 10-5 is In the process of 042AKS060, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and an acquired number of "0165" is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). In addition, with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-27), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the jackpot performance, the winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-13 (c-27). ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up. In this way, in rounds other than the first round, even if the prize is won during the predetermined period, the number of wins is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that the "2R ” is displayed, and a jackpot effect corresponding to the second round is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". That is, "R" has been displayed continuously since the first round. Moreover, the display of "1R" continues to be displayed until the second R predetermined period has elapsed. In addition, the feature section 042AK of this embodiment shows an example in which a common jackpot effect is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to lighting control of the effect lamp 9), but it is executed in each round. The presentation during the jackpot may be different. The same applies to lighting of the production effect lamp 9. In this way, since the grand prize opening is opened before the round number display indicating that it is the second round, the game ball of the player who has been firing continuously since the first round is released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize opening. Therefore, in each round of a plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that successive game balls will win a prize in the big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the grand prize opening is controlled to open in response to the 2nd R, and as shown in Figure 10-13 (a-29). 10-14 (a-31 ), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of acquisitions obtained in the 1st R continues to be displayed. From then on, the same process is performed until the predetermined final round, and when it is determined that the winning end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. 10-5, a jackpot performance corresponding to the round is performed to perform the ending performance. Configure settings to terminate. In this way, from the second round onwards, if you do not win within the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, but if you win during the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed will continue to be displayed. , the number of acquired balls is added to the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning opening even in the second and subsequent rounds.

For example, in the final round, if the 10th game ball enters the grand prize hole and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball enters the grand prize hole. As shown in Figure 10-15, the jackpot game state may end with the ball stuck in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, the game ball will enter the big winning hole at the start of the 1st R (when the big winning hole corresponding to the 1st R is opened) in the case of the next jackpot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R. A winning game ball occurs. In this case as well, as shown in Figure 10-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is lit in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, As shown in (a-21), after performing a count-up display, "0015" may be displayed as the acquisition number display. In addition, in such a case, there is a possibility that the fired game ball will win another prize during the predetermined period (possibility that the second ball will win), and in that case, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the game ball shown in Figure 10-11 ( As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after performing a count-up display, it is sufficient to display "0030" directly as the acquisition number display without displaying "0000" or "0015". According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase the interest in the game.

As explained above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature part 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the number of wins in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the big prize opening is opened and the first round is started. If the game ball does not enter the grand prize slot within a predetermined period after the first round has started, a predetermined display is made after the predetermined period to indicate that the number of wins has not increased, and If the game ball enters the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of one round, the number of wins is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the first round has started, the performance control CPU 120 directly specifies the winning number without displaying the number of wins of "0000" as a predetermined display. A display of the number of acquisitions of "0015" is displayed as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent confusion from being caused to the players and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display to notify that the number of wins will increase if the game ball enters the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of the first round. , displays the acquisition number display of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a winning and the number of wins increases.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command for specifying the opening of the opening of the opening that is transmitted from the main board 11 in response to the opening of the opening of the opening. The number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 allows the launched game balls to pass through the second route at the upper part of the grand prize opening door and guide them to the ejection path by keeping the grand prize opening door in a closed state. By opening the winning opening door, the fired game balls are guided to the big winning opening through a first route and detected by a count switch 23. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the counting switch 23 detects the game ball present at the door of the big winning opening is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period of time. . According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present at the top of the grand prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the grand prize opening, and the player can enjoy the game without feeling anxious. It is possible to prevent a decrease in

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the performance control CPU 120 performs a right-handed hit as shown in FIG. By performing a performance, it is displayed to the player that he should hit the ball to the right. According to this, since the game area to be fired during a jackpot is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game enjoyment can be improved.

The open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening is completely open, that is, the big winning opening door has moved to a completely open position, and the big winning opening door is completely open. In response to detecting that the main board 11 has moved to a completely open position, a command to designate the opening of the big prize opening is transmitted from the main board 11 side. According to this, since a predetermined period of time is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, for game balls that are fired due to the right-handed performance before the 1st round starts (before the grand prize opening is open) (game balls that are hit quickly), the grand prize opening is in the open state. If there is a prize at the top of the big prize opening at the timing when Displays the number of acquisitions as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game balls hit quickly from being wasted.

Also, for example, in the final round, if the 10th game ball enters the grand prize hole and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball As shown in Figure 10-15, the jackpot game state may end with the ball stuck in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, the game ball will enter the big winning hole at the start of the 1st R (when the big winning hole corresponding to the 1st R is opened) in the case of the next jackpot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R. A game ball wins, and the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of wins as a specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a fanfare performance indicating that a jackpot game state has been entered until the big prize opening changes from a closed state to an open state. Then, after the big prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the round number is displayed together with the winning number, and it is possible to execute a jackpot performance corresponding to the round game. According to this, it is possible to add variety to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the production control CPU 120, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, The attacker lamp 9c is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). In addition, as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), even if a game ball enters the grand prize opening other than the predetermined period, the attacker lamp will appear as shown in Figure 10-12 (c-23). Turn on 9c. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and it is possible to visually recognize that a prize has been won within a predetermined period of time. It becomes easier.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. The device emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times the light is emitted per hour (a manner that notifies winnings). According to this, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the production control CPU 120, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening becomes open, the production control CPU 120 controls the A winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even if a game ball wins in the grand prize opening other than the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is outputted. According to this, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, for the rounds after the first round, the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the round in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the start of the round. conduct. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning successive game balls into a big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

In addition, when the second round and subsequent round games are played, if the game medium does not enter the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened, the performance control CPU 120 controls the As shown in 10-14 (a-31), when the winning number display that was displayed in the previous round game continues to be displayed, and the gaming medium enters the corresponding grand prize slot within the specified period. As shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the number of acquired balls awarded corresponding to the winning is added and displayed from the acquired number displayed in the previous round game. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning hole even in the second round and onwards.

Further, even when an over-win occurs, for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and displays the number of wins of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of acquisitions are displayed according to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-win are displayed, but as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-25) As shown in , the count-up display and the number-of-wins display corresponding to the over-win are completed within the period from when the big winning opening is completely closed until before it becomes open state corresponding to the 2nd R. According to this, since the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning.

In addition, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of wins is not displayed, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball enters the big prize opening, in a situation where the number of wins is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, for example, as shown in Figure 10-11 (c-20) and ( c-21), the production effect lamps 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the production effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are turned on alternately, and more The production effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to enliven the subsequent performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the right-handed performance and the fanfare performance before the start of the first round, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13) to suggest a right-handed hit. For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect provided on the game board 2 The lamps 9 are turned on alternately. According to this, it is possible to suggest right-handed hitting using the production effect lamp 9. In addition, when the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right-handed hit, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-15). Instead of turning off the light, the light may be left on as is. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the grand prize opening is in the open state.

Furthermore, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if counted after the predetermined period has elapsed for 10 game balls to win. According to this, since sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 operates as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, that is, until the number of wins is displayed. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 is not turned on until the number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figures 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). let According to this, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance control CPU 120 causes the performance effect lamp 9 to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot performance after a predetermined period has elapsed. let According to this, the performance can be made more exciting at once at the timing when the jackpot performance is executed, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, at the timing when the number of wins is displayed, the production control CPU 120 displays an effect display that transitions and displays decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute a jackpot, suggesting a right-handed hit. Do it in a certain manner. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should play to the right, making it easier for the player to recognize that the player should play to the right.

(Modified example of characteristic part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the production effect lamps 9 light up in order to suggest that you should hit the ball to the right. Although an example has been shown in which all the performance effect lamps 9 are turned off after the right-handed performance using the performance effect lamps 9 is finished, this is just one example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the state shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 10-16 (c-16A), at the timing when the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. An attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be turned on. According to this, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize that the big prize opening is in the open state. Note that the attacker lamp 9c may continue to be lit until a predetermined period of time has elapsed or during the open period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when updating the round display from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". , an example has been shown in which "R" is continuously displayed from the first round and "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in Figure 10-17, at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the big prize opening becomes closed, the display of "1" of the display of "1R" is erased. , only "R" may be displayed. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the second R predetermined period has elapsed, and a round display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round may be performed. The same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, it is possible to visually confirm the end of each round, and it is possible to add variety to the game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the number of winnings that is the upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened is 10 (the upper limit number of winnings is 10), but for example, if the upper limit winnings is 1, , it may be arranged so that if two pieces are won during a predetermined period before the round number is displayed, the winning is over. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound) may be output as the winning sound for over winning during the predetermined period, and the attacker lamp 9c may also be made to emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of over winning. .

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, regarding the display of the number of wins, an example was shown in which winnings of game balls into the big winning hole are counted, but in addition to this, winnings into the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Good too. In addition, since right-handed hitting is performed during the jackpot, the general winning hole that wins the prize is the general winning hole 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in the case where winnings in the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Note that description of the same parts as in FIG. 10-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS056 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the general winning prize indicating that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 is further shown. It is determined whether the designated command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the production control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls acquired ( Step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or if the general winning designation command is not received, that is, if there is no winning in the general winning hole 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process moves to step 042AKS059. In addition, with the winning to the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won to the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the winning sound when winning to the grand winning hole) may be output.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042 AKS062 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042 AKS062; No), it is further shown that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether a general prize designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the production control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won ( Step 042AKS083), and the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed (Step 042AKS085). When displaying the updated number of acquisitions in step 042AKS085, a count-up display (display indicating that the number of acquisitions has increased) is performed, and then the acquisition number is displayed. After executing the process of step 042AKS085, or if the general winning designation command is not received, that is, if there is no winning in the general winning hole 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the process moves to step 042AKS065. In addition, with the winning to the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won to the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the winning sound when winning to the grand winning hole) may be output.

Next, an example of the performance operation in the case where winnings in the general winning hole 10 are also counted will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20. FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20 are diagrams illustrating display examples of performance operations, opening/closing states of the grand prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps on the image display device 5. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Figure 10-19 are ( Same as a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the grand prize opening is opened, a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When the game ball enters the general winning hole 10, the state shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball enters the general winning hole 10 as shown in Figure 10-19 (b-18A), or from the state shown in Figure 10-19 (b-17), the game ball also enters the general winning hole 10. If time passes without any winnings in the winning slot 10, and a predetermined period of time passes as shown in Figures 10-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), the game ball will be awarded a general prize. If a prize is won in the mouth 10, the state shifts to the states shown in Figures 10-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in Figure 10-20 (a-20A). , a round number display of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is performed, and a count-up display is also performed. Also, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot effect (first R effect), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-20 (a-20A). , and characters are displayed. In the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the acquisition number display.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball entering the general winning hole 10, as shown in FIG. " is displayed. In addition, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as a jackpot production (1st R production), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to a preset light emission pattern according to the effect during the jackpot are common regardless of whether a prize is won or not.

In this way, even if a game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined prize After the period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the number of wins in response to winnings in the general winning hole 10. In addition, when no game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded. Therefore, since the number of winnings corresponding to the winnings is also displayed for game balls that have entered the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent players from feeling anxious.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 042AK is a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays the content displayed on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and a control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable prize winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when the control is in the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means ( For example, displaying the number of wins), a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first round game among the plurality of round games is played. After the winning amount has elapsed, the award amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning amount is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the big prize opening is opened), and within the predetermined period, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the number of wins), and If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the win number display) etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display if the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period. (For example, instead of displaying "0000", "0015" may be displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent confusion among players and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means is configured to provide the gaming value when the gaming medium enters the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period. After performing a count-up display indicating ``0015'', a display corresponding to the gaming value given as the specific display is performed (for example, after performing a count-up display that is a display indicating that the number of acquisitions will increase, ).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that there has been a winning and the number of wins has increased.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means may display a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state. Start displaying the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed after reception (for example, start counting the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing when the big prize opening designation command transmitted from the main board 11 side is received) etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable winning means is configured to lead the gaming medium to a winning path (for example, a large winning path) by being in the first state. By opening the winning slot door, the ejected game ball passes through the first route and is guided to the big winning slot, etc.), and when the winning slot door is in the second state, the game medium is guided to the discharge route. A route forming means including two routes (for example, by closing the grand prize opening door, the fired game ball passes through a second route in the upper part of the grand prize opening door and is guided to the discharge route) and a detection means (for example, count switch 23, etc.) that is formed in the winning route and detects winning of the game medium, and the time from the route forming means to the detection means for the game medium is within the predetermined period. (For example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time it takes for the game ball present in the big winning opening door part to be detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game balls present above the grand prize opening will be detected within a predetermined period of time after the grand prize opening is opened, and the player can enjoy the game without feeling anxious. The decline can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, the player Perform an operation promotion display to encourage operation (for example, after a jackpot is achieved and until the jackpot is opened, a right-handed performance as shown in Figure 10-7 (a-3) is performed to increase the game speed). (e.g., displaying to the player that he or she should hit the ball with the right hand).

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state is a state in which the variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example, The open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening is completely open, that is, the big winning opening door has moved to a completely open position, and the big winning opening door is completely open. In response to detecting that the opening has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 may send a large prize opening specifying command.

According to this configuration, since a predetermined period of time is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above, the operation promotion display is performed before the first round game in the advantageous state is started. When the fired game medium wins the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the game ball is fired by performing a right-handed hit effect before the start of the first round). However, it is possible to win at the timing when the big prize opening is opened, and if the prize is won within the predetermined period, the number of wins may be displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent game media fired before a round game is started from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above, in the last round game of the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, the variable winning means When changing from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state ends with the game medium sandwiched between them (for example, in the final round, the 11th game ball is a special variable winning ball, as shown in FIG. 10-15). (e.g., the jackpot game state ends while the player is stuck in the device 7 (more specifically, between the jackpot door and the glass door frame 3a), and the first round game when the jackpot game state is controlled again to the advantageous state. If the game medium in the sandwiched state wins a prize in the variable winning means by changing the variable winning means from the second state to the first state, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed ( For example, when the next jackpot occurs, the game ball enters the jackpot at the start of the first round, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the number of wins may be displayed as a specific display.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the period is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. , it is possible to execute a suggestive performance that suggests that the control has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare performance that suggests that the jackpot gaming state has entered the state until the big prize opening changes from the closed state to the open state) can be executed. At the same time as the display of the award amount starts to be displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round game display that can identify the round game being executed and an in-round effect corresponding to the round game can be executed. (For example, after the big prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of wins, and it is possible to perform a jackpot performance corresponding to the round game.)

According to such a configuration, it is possible to add variety to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 043AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 043AK. (1) The gaming machine according to characteristic part 043AK is a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays the content displayed on the display means (for example, the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and,
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, (such as a CPU 103 that plays a round game), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value that is awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means (for example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game) displaying a number, etc.), after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first round game among the plurality of round games is played. The award amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the big prize opening is opened), and the game medium enters the variable prize means within the predetermined period. If not, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been provided is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display), and the predetermined period is If the game medium wins within the variable prize winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display, etc.). , further comprising a light emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9, etc.), and a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means controls the game medium after the predetermined period has elapsed. Controlling the light emitting means in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the winning of the game medium in the case where the winning means is won by the variable winning means and in the case where the game medium is won in the variable winning means before the elapse of the predetermined period ( For example, when a game ball wins in the big prize opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether the prize is won within a predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and also when a prize is won within a predetermined period. becomes easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium is won in the variable winning means. ), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and when a game medium is won in the variable winning means, the light emission of the specific light emitting means is , the number of times of light emission per unit time is greater than the light emission of the predetermined light emitting means (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064), the game other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light during the jackpot performance The effect lamp 9 may emit light in a manner that is greater than the number of times the lamp emits light per unit time (a manner that notifies that a prize has been won), etc.).

According to this configuration, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above further includes a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the sound output means is configured to operate when a game medium wins a prize in the variable prize winning means. A winning sound corresponding to a winning is output, and even if the game medium enters the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed, or if the gaming medium enters the variable winning means before the predetermined period elapses, the entered prize is output. It is also possible to output a sound (for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the big prize opening, a winning sound is output regardless of whether or not the prize is won within a predetermined period).

According to this configuration, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 044AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 044AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 044AK is a gaming machine (such as the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays the content displayed on the display means (such as the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and a control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable prize winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when the control is in the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means ( (e.g., displaying the number of rounds obtained), it is possible to display a round game display that allows identification of the round game being executed (e.g., displaying the number of rounds), and the first round among the plurality of round games. When a game is played, the award amount display and the round game display corresponding to the first round game are displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened), and the number of rounds won is displayed after the second round among the plurality of round games. When a game is played, the round game display corresponding to the second and subsequent round games is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the second round, the number of rounds is displayed after a predetermined period has passed after the grand prize opening is opened.) If the game medium does not enter the variable prize means within the predetermined period, the predetermined period After the elapsed time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been provided is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the acquisition number display, etc.), and within the predetermined period, the game medium is changed to the variable amount. When a prize is won by the prize winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

According to this configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving players a sense of anxiety, and also to , it is possible to increase the possibility that successive game balls will win a prize in the big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, when the second and subsequent round games are played, a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. If the game medium does not enter the variable prize winning means within the period, the award amount display that was displayed in the previous round game is continued to be displayed (for example, when the second round and subsequent round games are played, If the game medium does not enter the grand prize hole within a predetermined period after the grand prize hole is opened, as shown in Figure 10-14 (a-31), if the game medium is not entered into the big prize hole, the information displayed in the previous round game will be displayed. within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the second and subsequent round games are played. If the game medium wins in the variable winning means, the amount awarded according to the gaming value awarded in response to the winning is added from the amount displayed in the previous round game. (For example, if the game medium enters the corresponding big prize slot within a predetermined period, the number of acquisitions displayed in the previous round game will be changed from , the number of earned balls awarded in response to the winning is added and displayed), etc.

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning hole even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the display means is capable of updating and displaying the award amount display that is being displayed in response to winning of a game medium in the variable winning means. After the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state, the updating display of the awarded amount display ends before the variable winning means returns to the first state again (for example, when the big winning opening is completely closed). The count-up display and the number of wins corresponding to the over winnings may be completed within a period from when the prize is closed until the time when the prize is opened to the state corresponding to the second round.

According to this configuration, the update of the number of wins displayed at the time of one release does not overlap with the update of the number of wins displayed at the next release, making it easy to determine which release corresponds to the winning number. .

(Description of means related to characteristic part 045AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 045AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 045AK is a gaming machine (such as the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and that displays content on the display means (such as the image display device 5). (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that can change the game medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. and a control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable prize winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when the control is in the advantageous state. (For example, a CPU 103 that plays a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded when a game medium is won in the variable winning means ( For example, displaying the number of wins), a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first round game among the plurality of round games is played. After the winning amount has elapsed, the award amount display is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning amount is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the big prize opening is opened), and within the predetermined period, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display (for example, "0000" is displayed as the number of wins), and If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the win number display) etc.), a plurality of light emitting means (for example, the effect lamp 9, etc.), and a light emission control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emitting means, and the light emission control means is the variable winning means. is in the first state and the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed is better than when the variable winning means is in the first state and the award amount display is displayed before the predetermined period has elapsed. Control is performed so that more of the light emitting means emit light than when it is not displayed (for example, during a predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18) , in a situation where the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the grand prize opening, but the number of wins is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, for example, as shown in Figure 10-11 (c-20). As shown in (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are turned on alternately, and during a predetermined period It is characterized by the fact that many production effect lamps 9 emit light, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to enliven the performance after the game is performed, and to improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation promotion display that encourages the player to perform the operation is displayed. The light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c, etc.) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins a prize in the variable winning means. ), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c), and when the variable prize winning means is in the first state, the light emitting means before the predetermined period elapses. When the applied amount display is not displayed, the specified light emitting means is caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the operation promotion display while causing the specific light emitting means to emit light, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the applied amount display is displayed. 10-7 (c-3), the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are made to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, after the big prize opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, ) ~ As shown in Figure 10-9 (c-13), the production effect lamps 9 are lit in sequence to suggest right-handed hitting, and after a predetermined period of time, for example, as shown in Figure 10-11 (c-20) and (c -21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are lit alternately, and the grand prize opening is opened. If the production effect lamps 9 are to be lit in sequence later to suggest a right-handed hit, after the last attacker lamp 9c is lit, it is not turned off and remains lit as shown in Figure 10-9 (c-15). (e.g.).

According to this configuration, it is possible to promote the operation using the predetermined light emitting means, and it is also possible to make the player aware that the variable prize winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, in the round game, one of the round games ends when a certain number of game media win, and the game moves on to the next round game. (For example, when 10 game balls win, it becomes the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened.) The time is sufficient for the game media to win the specified number of prizes (for example, regarding the upper limit period during which the grand prize opening can be opened, it is sufficient to count from the elapse of the predetermined period for 10 game balls to win) period), etc.

According to this configuration, sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, so it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the round game ends when a certain number of game media are won, and the game moves on to the next round game (for example, when 10 game media are won). The time from when the predetermined period has elapsed until the variable winning means enters the second state is the period when the game medium is in the second state. It is enough time for a certain number of prizes to be won (for example, the upper limit period during which the grand prize opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if counted from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize). etc.), when the variable winning means is in the first state, when the award amount display before the predetermined period is not displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted, and the award after the predetermined period has elapsed. After the amount display is displayed, the light emitting means is made to emit light (for example, until the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined period has elapsed, that is, until the number of wins is displayed, As shown in c-19), the production effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period of time is displayed as shown in Figs. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). (e.g., causing the production effect lamp 9 to emit light from the scene).

According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (4) above, the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. A round game in which it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the following (for example, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect), and the round game being executed can be identified at the same time as the display of the award amount display starts after the elapse of the predetermined period. It is possible to execute an in-round effect corresponding to the display and the round game (for example, displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of acquisitions, and performing a jackpot effect after a predetermined period has elapsed), and at the same timing as the execution timing of the in-round effect. The light emitting means is caused to emit light at a timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot performance, etc.) , it may be done as follows.

According to this configuration, the performance can be made more exciting at once at the timing when the performance is executed during the round, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, further comprising general winning means (for example, general winning opening 10, etc.) in which game media can be won, and the display means The amount of gaming value awarded when a gaming medium is won in the general winning means can be displayed as the amount display. etc.), if the game medium does not win the general winning means within the predetermined period, display a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed ( For example, if a game ball does not enter the general winning hole 10 within a predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded), If a prize is won in the general winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a display corresponding to the fact that the prize has been won in the general winning means is displayed as the award amount display (for example, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened). If a game ball wins in the general winning hole 10, after the predetermined period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the number of wins in response to the winning in the general winning hole 10, etc.), etc. Good too.

According to this configuration, since a display corresponding to winning in the general winning means is also displayed regarding winnings in the general winning means during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent anxiety from being caused to the player.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the gaming area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the gaming area on the right side). The display means is capable of displaying a first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot) at the same timing as the award amount display, and the first image is displayed during the advantageous state. An effect is displayed at the same timing as the award amount display (for example, an effect display that moves decorative symbols constituting a jackpot is displayed), and the effect display is displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, an effect display (For example, the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot may be displayed in a manner suggesting a right-handed hit by moving them toward the back right, the front, and the back left.)

According to this configuration, the game area where the shot should be fired is suggested by the effect display, making it easier for the player to recognize the game area where the shot should be fired.

(Explanation regarding the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is displayed, and the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is notified that the number of prize balls awarded has reached a predetermined number. It is possible to display the acquisition number notification display. The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and notifying the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used to display the number of wins are such that the background image during the jackpot cannot be seen from the specific area. The specific characters used to display the number of wins are visible from the specific area during the jackpot background image.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the first form of the feature section 20SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background technology related to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-1 is a diagram illustrating background technology related to the first form of the feature section 20SH.

When the pachinko gaming machine is controlled in the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the pachinko gaming machine may display an acquisition number display regarding the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the number of acquired balls is displayed as "points 120" corresponding to the number of acquired balls being 120.

The number of acquired balls is displayed using numbers for displaying the number of prize balls and characters other than numbers for recognizing that the number of balls won is displayed. The numbers used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The acquired number display shown in Figure 11-1 (A) has the word "point" to remind you that it is a acquired number display, and the number "120" to display the number of prize balls. It is used.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters in which a specific area is formed. Here, the specific area is an area surrounded by lines forming characters, and is an area that does not communicate with areas outside the lines forming characters. Here, ``not communicating with the area outside the lines forming the characters'' means that the ``specific area'' is completely isolated from the ``area outside the lines forming the characters'' by the ``lines forming the characters.'' In other cases, the ``specific area'' is not completely separated by the ``line forming the characters'' from the ``area outside the lines forming the characters,'' but it appears to be a separate area at first glance. ,including. In the following description, a character in which a specific area is formed will be referred to as a "specific character."

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", the specific region is a substantially circular region surrounded by curved lines forming the characters. Two specific areas are formed for the Arabic numeral "8". In the case of the Arabic numeral "4", the specific region is a triangular region surrounded by three straight lines forming the character.

Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to be in the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), a jackpot background image in which a "butterfly" is flying is displayed. The jackpot background image is an image that is displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the jackpot game state. The background video during the jackpot includes many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The acquisition number display is displayed in a small size in the end area of the display area of the image display device that does not obstruct the visibility of the background image during the jackpot. When the jackpot background image changes over time, the line of the jackpot background image may overlap with the back of the winning number display. If a specific character is displayed on the winning number display, the jackpot will appear on the back of the specific area of the specific character, like the "0" part of the Arabic numeral surrounded by the two-dot chain line in Figure 11-1 (A). When the lines of the medium background image overlap, the lines of the jackpot medium background image may be assimilated with the lines forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character.

FIG. 11-1(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-1(A). In the example shown in Figures 11-1 (A) and (B), the line of the "butterfly" in the jackpot background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of acquisitions. During the jackpot, the ``butterfly'' line in the background image is assimilated with the line forming the specific character ``0,'' making the specific character ``0'' look like the Arabic numeral ``8'' instead of the Arabic numeral ``0''.

In this way, if the characters in the acquired number display are mistakenly recognized as characters different from the original characters, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line included in the jackpot background image so that the line of the jackpot background image does not overlap with a specific area of a specific character.

The first form of the characteristic portion 20SH was created in view of this background. The first form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described below.

(Display of the number of acquisitions in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the first form of the feature section 20SH.

In the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific area 20SHI1 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions is , is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-2 (A), the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS1 used to display the number of acquisitions is "black", while the specific characters "0", "4", "6" ”, “8”, and “9” specific areas 20SHI1 are displayed in “white”.

Further, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters, but the display mode of the specific area 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters, but the display mode of the characters is Any display mode may be used as long as it has a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed.

For example, it is sufficient that the color of the specific area 20SHI1 has a high contrast with the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture with a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI1 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Among the characters used to display the number of balls won, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the number of prize balls and specific characters other than numbers to recognize that the number of balls won are shown in Figure 11- Like the Arabic numerals shown in 2(A), the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic section 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the first form of the feature section 20SH.

When the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko game machine 1 displays an acquired number notification display to notify that fact.

Here, the time saving control and probability change control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state are such that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times, or the jackpot game state is changed before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. However, for example, the number of times of time saving control and probability changing control may be different for each type of jackpot, or in the case of a specific jackpot type, the number of times of time saving control and probability varying control may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. The accuracy control and time saving control may be continuously executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state until a jackpot occurs again. In such a case, the jackpot game state occurs continuously without intervening the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive game state.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in a consecutive game state, when the number of prize balls awarded in multiple jackpot game states in the consecutive game state reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays an acquisition number notification display to notify that fact. do.

The acquisition number notification display includes a number to display the predetermined number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is the acquisition number notification display. and are used. The numbers used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the first form of the feature section 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-2(B), a specific area of a specific character used for displaying the acquisition number notification is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in Figure 11-2 (B), among the Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters are specified. The area 20SHI2 is displayed in a transparent display mode.

Among the characters used for the acquisition number notification display, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is reached, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the predetermined number, or the acquisition number notification display. Specific characters other than numbers for recognition are also displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, like the Arabic numerals shown in FIG. 11-2(B).

(How the number of acquisitions is displayed in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-3(A) is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the feature section 20SH. FIG. 11-3(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-1(A).

In the example shown in Figures 11-3 (A) and (B), the "butterfly" line of the jackpot background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquisition number display 20SHK. However, since the specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white", the background image during the jackpot cannot be viewed from the specific area 20SHI1. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI1, the "butterfly" line 20SHHS of the background image during the jackpot is not assimilated with the line 20SHS1 forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" is accurately represented as the Arabic numeral "0". can be recognized.

In addition to the acquisition number display 20SHK, the image display device 5 also displays a jackpot display 20SHO to make the user recognize that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled, and a jackpot combination derived and displayed when the jackpot gaming state is controlled. A decorative pattern display 20SHZ showing the confirmed decorative pattern, a round number display 20SHR showing the number of rounds of the round game in the jackpot game state, and a right-handed display 20SHM indicating to the player that he should play right-handed are displayed. has been done. The jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM are also placed in the edge area of the display area of the image display device 5 that does not obstruct the visibility of the background image during a jackpot, similar to the number of wins display 20SHK. displayed small.

The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM are the same type of characters as the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and the acquisition number display 20SHK and acquisition number display. It may also include characters of a different type from the characters used for the number notification display. In this embodiment, the characters of the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH use "numbers" and "katakana" as shown in FIG. 11-4. On the other hand, the jackpot display 20SHO uses "alphabet" and "kanji" which are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. Further, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ uses "numbers", which are the same type of characters as those used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. In addition, the round number display 20SHR has "numbers" that are the same type of characters as the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and the characters that are different from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. "Alphabet", which is a type of character, is used. Furthermore, the right-handed display 20SHM uses "kanji", "hiragana", and "symbols" that are different types of characters from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display.

Among the characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM, there are characters that correspond to specific characters regardless of the type of the characters. The specific areas of specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also in a non-transparent display mode, similar to the specific area 20SHI1 of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK. Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed, the background image during the jackpot cannot be viewed from the specific area 20SHI1.

(Example of production operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-4 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of displaying the number of acquisitions and displaying the number of acquisitions notification.

In this embodiment, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A). A second display area 20SH52, which is narrower than 20SH51, is distinguished from each other to perform various displays. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the area inside the two-dot chain line is the first display area 20SH51, and the area outside the two-dot chain line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays the background image during the jackpot in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number display 20SHK on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the second display area 20SH52 also displays a jackpot display, a decorative symbol display, a round number display, and a right hit display.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. In FIG. 11-4 (A), since "990 points" and the acquired number display 20SHK are displayed, it is easy to recognize that 990 game balls were paid out as prize balls in the jackpot game state. can. The performance control CPU 120 updates the number of the acquired number display 20SHK every time a game ball is paid out in the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, it is assumed that game balls enter the grand prize opening and 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In response to the fact that 15 game balls have been paid out, the production control CPU 120 changes the number of acquired number display 20SHK from "990" as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (B) to (G). Count up by 1 until "1005". In that case, the number in the acquired number display 20SHK will go through the so-called "Kiriban", which is a round number of "1000". In other words, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached "1000".

Here, the performance control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display every time "1000" game balls are paid out in the jackpot game state. For example, when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "1000," the performance control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display saying "over 1000," and when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "2000," ”, a display indicating the number of acquisitions “over 2000” is displayed.

When the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches "1000" of Kiriban, the production control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification on the right end of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (D). A part of display 20SHKH is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (E) to (G), the performance control CPU 120 displays the number displayed in each frame of the video while the number of the acquired number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005". The display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is moved from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number on the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches "1005," the performance control CPU 120 displays the acquisition number in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (G). The notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed. At this time, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

Through such display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display of the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (H), the performance control CPU 120 displays the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Move it towards the left edge of the area.

Through such display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and is stopped when it is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. finish.

The performance control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed when the number of the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes "Kiriban", and from that timing When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, display control may be performed to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and from that timing, the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is started. Display control may be performed to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when the number of acquisitions has elapsed.

As described above, the specific area of the specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-4(E) to 11-4(H), the jackpot background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character used in the winning number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 11-4(E) to (H), the jackpot background image is visible from the specific area of the Arabic numeral "0" which is a specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH.

Furthermore, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (D) to (H).

Note that the presentation mode when stopping and displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 is not limited to the mode in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is brought into the frame, stopped, and then framed out. For example, instead of displaying the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH in the frame, the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH may pop out from the back side of the screen to the front side of the screen, or the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH may gradually come out. Alternatively, a character may appear and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed in a speech bubble showing the character's lines. Also, instead of the effect of causing the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH to go out of frame, it may be possible to create an effect in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is sucked from the front side of the screen to the back side, or the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may gradually disappear. It may be an effect such that when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a speech bubble indicating the character's dialogue, the character leaves.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, in at least the first display area 20SH51, the acquired number on the front side of the background image during the jackpot to notify that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As the notification display 20SHKH, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display saying "1000 over", and the prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state can be displayed. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display a display indicating the number of obtained "over 2000". The acquired number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display. The characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK make it impossible to see the background image during the jackpot from the specific area. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH allow the background image during the jackpot to be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH including specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background image. For example, when checking the number of prize balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the acquired number display 20SHK, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and is not specified. If the jackpot background image is visible from a specific area of the character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character, but the jackpot background image is made invisible from the specific area of the specific character. This allows specific characters to be recognized accurately. In addition, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display 20SHK, but is displayed when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period to congratulate the winner, and since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, the background image during the jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific letters. By doing so, it becomes possible to show even a little of the background image during the jackpot in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

Further, as described above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9".

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH using Arabic numerals can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background image.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH while displaying the acquisition number display 20SHK.

According to such a configuration, even when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state can be accurately grasped from the winning number display 20SHK.

Furthermore, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is easily noticed by the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". .

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative symbol display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, and a right hit display 20SHM on the front side of the jackpot medium background image in the second display area 20SH52. It is. The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM are the same type of characters as those used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and This includes characters of a different type from the characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH, and all types of characters include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM make the jackpot background image invisible from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, specific characters can be accurately recognized also in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can stop and display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51, and can frame the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH to the stopping position in the first display area 20SH51. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is caused to frame out.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the second form of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-5 to 11-7. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the second form of the feature section 20SH, the specific characters used in the win number notification display 20SHKH are more specific to the specific area relative to the area of the line forming the characters than the specific characters used in the win number display 20SHK. Portion size proportions are small.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the second form of the feature section 20SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Obtainment number notification display in second form of feature section 20SH)
FIG. 11-5(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature section 20SH.

The pachinko game machine 1 related to the second form of the feature section 20SH uses three-dimensional characters to display the number of wins. Here, the three-dimensional character is a character format that makes the character appear to pop out to the front. The line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS21 expressing the character and an area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the three-dimensional character.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are also characters that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-5 (A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI3 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the jackpot background image, the jackpot background image becomes visible from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-3D characters and 3D characters)
FIG. 11-5(B) is an explanatory diagram comparing the non-3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions.

Comparing the non-3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions, it is found that the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-3D character and the size of the line area forming the 3D character. The size of the area 20SHS21 expressing characters is the same size. In the case of a non-three-dimensional specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is an area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the case of a three-dimensional specific character, since the area of lines forming the character includes the area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the character, the inner outline of the area 20SHS21 that expresses the character and the area located on the inner side thereof The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character becomes the specific area 20SHI3. Therefore, the 3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions is displayed in the area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the character, which is located on the inner circumference side of the area 20SHS21 that expresses the character, rather than the non-3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions. The size of the specific area is reduced by the size, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area forming the character is small.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in second form of feature section 20SH)
FIG. 11-6(A) is a diagram showing a modification example 1 of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used in the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the feature section 20SH.

In the example shown in Figure 11-6(A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI4 is displayed in "white", and when displayed in front of the jackpot background image, the jackpot background image becomes invisible from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison of non-3D characters and 3D characters in modification example 1)
FIG. 11-6(B) is an explanatory diagram comparing the non-3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in Modification 1.

Also in Modified Example 1, when comparing the non-3D characters used to display the number of acquisitions and the 3D characters used to display the number of acquisitions, it is found that the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-3D characters and the size of the three-dimensional characters forming the 3D characters. The size of the line area 20SH31 representing the character is the same as that of the line area 20SH31. In the case of a non-three-dimensional specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is an area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the case of a three-dimensional specific character, the area of lines forming the character includes an area 20SH32 that expresses the depth of the character, so the inner outline of the area 20SH31 that expresses the character and the characters on the inner side The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the area 20SHI4 becomes the specific area 20SHI4. Therefore, the 3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions is displayed in the area 20SH32 that expresses the depth of the character, which is located on the inner circumference side of the area 20SH31 that expresses the character, than the non-3D specific character used to display the number of acquisitions. The size of the specific area is reduced by the size of , and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area forming the character is small.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in second form of feature section 20SH)
FIG. 11-7(A) is a diagram showing a second modification of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the feature section 20SH.

In modification example 2, as shown in Figure 11-7 (A), the characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions are displayed in a three-color gradation in the line area forming the character. The display is displayed in any one of display modes A to G, which have different combinations.

The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode A is colored with a gradation of three colors: "red" in the upper region 20SHSU, "orange" in the center region 20SHSC, and "yellow" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode B is colored with a gradation of three colors: "orange" in the upper region 20SHSU, "yellow" in the center region 20SHSC, and "green" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode C is colored with a gradation of three colors: "yellow" in the upper region 20SHSU, "green" in the center region 20SHSC, and "light blue" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode D is colored with a gradation of three colors: "green" in the upper region 20SHSU, "light blue" in the center region 20SHSC, and "blue" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode E is colored with a gradation of three colors: "light blue" in the upper region 20SHSU, "blue" in the center region 20SHSC, and "purple" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode F is colored with a gradation of three colors: "blue" in the upper region 20SHSU, "purple" in the center region 20SHSC, and "red" in the lower region 20SHSD. The area of the lines forming the characters of display mode G is colored with a gradation of three colors: "purple" in the upper region 20SHSU, "red" in the center region 20SHSC, and "yellow" in the lower region 20SHSD.

The image display device 5 changes the format of the characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the following order: display format A → display format B → display format C → display format D → display format E → display format F → display format G → display format A → ... are changed over time and displayed.

FIG. 11-7(B) is a diagram showing an example of a color change accompanying the operation of displaying the number of acquisitions in Modification 2.

In modification example 2, as shown in FIG. 11-7(B), there are cases when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moved (frame-in). The speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes is different depending on when the player is out of frame.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7(B), the acquisition number notification display is displayed while moving (frame-in) from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51 over a period of 0.35 seconds. , changes sequentially from display mode A to display mode D. Thereafter, the acquisition number display changes in order from display mode D to display mode G while being stopped and displayed for one second in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Thereafter, while the acquisition number notification display moves (frames out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left end of the display area of the image display device 5 over a period of 0.35 seconds, the display mode changes from display mode G to display mode C. Change.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display regarding the number of prize balls awarded on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, in at least the first display area 20SH51, the acquired number on the front side of the background image during the jackpot to notify that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As a notification display, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "1000 over", and the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state can be displayed. When the number reaches "2000 pieces", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "2000 over". The acquired number display is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display. The characters used to display the number of acquisitions are larger than the characters used to display the number of acquisitions. The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and notifying the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. In addition, the background image of the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used to display the number of wins. The specific character used for displaying the acquisition number notification has a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the area of the line forming the character than the specific character used for displaying the acquisition number.

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background image. For example, when checking the number of prize balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the acquired number display, but the acquired number display is displayed in small sized characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and the acquired number display is If the background image during the jackpot is visible from a specific area, there is a possibility that the specific character will look different from the original character, but by making the background image during the jackpot invisible from the specific area of the specific character, Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

Furthermore, the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are three-dimensional characters. The line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area representing the character and an area representing the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the acquisition number notification display.

Furthermore, as described above, the background image of the jackpot background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific characters used for displaying the winning number notification.

According to this configuration, the acquisition number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display, but when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban" It is displayed only for a predetermined period to congratulate the player when he or she plays the game, and is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the size of the line areas 20SHS21 and 20SHS22 forming the characters. Since the ratio of the size of the specific area 20SHI3 to the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character is small, it is possible not only to suppress the risk of misrecognizing the character even if the background image during the jackpot can be seen from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character, but also to suppress the risk of misrecognizing the character. The production effect can be enhanced by making the background image visible during the jackpot from 20SHI3.

Further, as described above, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display in the first modification are such that the jackpot background image is not visible from the specific area 20SHI4.

According to this configuration, the acquisition number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display, but when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban" It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time to congratulate the player when the player has played, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, with a specific area corresponding to the size of the line area forming the characters. Since the ratio of the size of is small, it is possible not only to suppress the sense of discomfort even if the jackpot background image cannot be seen from a specific area of a specific character, but also to make the jackpot background image invisible from a specific area of a specific character. By doing this, you can prevent characters from being misidentified.

Further, as described above, in the characters used for displaying the acquisition number notification in the second modification, the line area forming the characters is displayed in a three-color gradation. The image display device 5 then changes the format of the characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions to display format A → display format B → display format C → display format D → display format E → display format F → display format G → display format. The display changes over time in the order of A→.... Then, when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and when the number of acquisitions notification display is moving (frame in/frame out), the number of acquisitions notification display changes. The speed at which the display mode changes is different.

According to such a configuration, the display mode changes depending on the moving speed of the acquired number notification display, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(Explanation regarding the third form of the characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11. In the pachinko game machine 1 related to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH, the specific characters used for displaying the result are such that the ending background video is visible from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the third form of the feature section 20SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used to display results)
FIG. 11-8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used in the result display in the third form of the feature section 20SH.

When the pachinko game machine 1 finishes the round game of the final round, it executes an ending performance corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ending background video. Furthermore, while displaying the ending background video, the image display device 5 displays a result display that informs the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state.

The result display uses numbers for displaying the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state and characters other than numbers for recognizing that it is a result display. The numbers used for displaying the results are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used for displaying results, there are characters that correspond to specific characters. In the third form of the feature section 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-8, a specific area of a specific character used for displaying a result is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in Figure 11-8, the specific areas 20SHI5 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used in the result display are transparent. It is displayed in the display mode.

Among the characters used in the result display, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state and characters other than numbers to recognize that it is a result display are also shown in Figure 11. The specific area is displayed in a transparent manner, as shown by the Arabic numeral 8.

(Various performances in jackpot game state)
FIG. 11-9 is a diagram showing an example of performance periods of various performances in the jackpot game state. FIG. 11-10 is a diagram showing an example of performance operation of various performances in a jackpot game state.

The performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing an in-retention consecutive game notice indicating that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in accordance with the stored reservation information when the reservation information is stored in the jackpot gaming state. be. For example, in the case of a jackpot game state with all 10 rounds, the production control CPU 120 will control the performance control CPU 120 after 9 rounds of round games are completed and the final round game as shown in FIGS. At timing T1 when a round game of 10 rounds is started, a pending consecutive game notice is started.

When the on-hold consecutive game notice is executed, the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 displays a message indicating that the round game is in progress in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 11-10(B). During the jackpot, an effect image of the pending consecutive winnings preview will be displayed on the front side of the background image. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the effect image 20SHE of "flame" is displayed as the effect image of the pending multiplayer preview.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the "flame" line of the effect image overlaps the back side of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquired number display 20SHK. Since the specific area is displayed in "white", the effect video cannot be viewed from the specific area. Therefore, in a specific area, the "flame" line in the effect image is not assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0". .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 (B) to (C), at timing T2 when the round game of the final round is finished and the ending performance is started, the performance control CPU 120 End the series preview and start the ending performance. When the ending effect is started, the ending background image is started to be displayed at a predetermined brightness in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(C), in the first display area 20SH51, an ending background image in which a snowstorm of cherry blossoms dances from the back of the screen is displayed. Further, in front of the ending background image, the words "Jackpot End" are displayed in response to the end of the jackpot game state.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 ends the on-hold series preview before the ending background video starts to be displayed at timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background video is displayed, the effect video 20SHE of the on-hold consecutive show preview is not displayed. In other words, the effect video 20SHE of the on-hold consecutive show preview is displayed when the ending background video is not displayed.

The ending background image only needs to be an image displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and as shown in FIG. 11-10(D), the ending background image may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. There may be cases where In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(D), the cherry blossom snowstorm displayed as the ending background image is dancing across the screen.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-10 (D) to (E), at timing T3 to start displaying the result, the effect control CPU 120 sets the brightness of the ending background image to a value lower than a predetermined brightness. It lowers the brightness to a certain dark level, pauses the progress of the ending background image, and displays it as a still image. Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays the result display 20SHRE on the front side of the ending background image at a brightness that is brighter than the specific brightness of the still image of the ending background image. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(E), the fluttering cherry blossoms have come to rest, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white characters.

As described above, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are displayed with the specific area 20SHI5 being transparent. Therefore, the ending background image of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE is visible from the specific area 20SHI5.

Note that the characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A), (B), and (E). Further, the result display 20SHRE only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and as shown in FIG. 11-10(E), it is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. It may happen.

(Suggestion of setting based on ending background video)
FIG. 11-11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a presentation mode of setting suggestion presentation using an ending background image.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table according to the set value. The setting value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball payout rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6" In the order of , the larger the value, the higher the ball payout rate. In other words, when "1" is set as the setting value, it is the least advantageous for the player, and as the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

The pachinko game machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH is configured to be able to change the setting value and to display the above-mentioned ending background image as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is low, the performance control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which cherry blossoms are falling from the back of the screen, as shown in FIG. 11-11(A). On the other hand, when the setting value is set high, the performance control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which a large amount of snowflakes fall from cherry blossom trees in full bloom on the left and right sides, as shown in FIG. 11-11(B).

Note that the setting suggestion by the ending background video does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the setting value is low, the ending background image shown in Figure 11-11(B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the setting value is high, the ending background image may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate. In addition, the ending background image shown in FIG. 11-11(A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate.

Furthermore, the ending background video may have different performance modes depending on whether the setting value is "6", which is the most advantageous for the player, or when it is not the setting value "6". Further, the ending background video may have different effects depending on whether the setting value is an odd number or the setting value is an even number.

Here, the above-mentioned on-hold consecutive game notice is one of a plurality of types of notice effects for foretelling the jackpot reliability, but the setting suggestion performance based on the pending consecutive game notice is not executed.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state at least in the first display area 20SH51. Furthermore, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 controls the jackpot game state in accordance with the stored hold information in the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. It is possible to display an effect image 20SHE of a preview of consecutive games on hold that suggests that the same will be played. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the jackpot background image in the second display area 20SH52. Further, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 displays a result display on the front side of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51 that notifies the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state. Display 20SHRE can be displayed. The characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. Further, the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK make it impossible to see the background image during the jackpot and the effect image 20SHRE of the on-hold consecutive winnings preview from the specific area. On the other hand, the ending background image of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE is visible from the specific area 20SHI5.

According to such a configuration, the acquired number display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the jackpot background video and the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive winnings notice, and the result display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the ending background video. For example, when checking the number of prize balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the acquired number display 20SHK, but the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, Because it may overlap with the effect video 20SHE of the preview, if the background video during the jackpot or the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive preview is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character will appear to be a different character from the original character. However, by making the background image during a jackpot and the effect image 20SHE of a preview of consecutive games on hold invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and does not overlap with the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive show preview, so the ending background video can be viewed from the specific area of the specific characters. By making it possible, it becomes possible to show even a little of the ending background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area 20SH51.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set any one of a plurality of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can display the ending background video in a manner that suggests the set value. The effect video 20SHRE of the on-hold consecutive game preview is one of a plurality of types of preview presentations for foretelling the jackpot reliability, but the setting suggestion performance based on the pending consecutive game preview is not executed.

According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect using the ending background video will be executed, the significance of the ending background video being visible from the specific area 20SHI5 of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE is It increases.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background video at a predetermined brightness. Then, at timing T3 when starting to display the result display 20SHRE, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background video at a specific brightness that is darker than a predetermined brightness, and displays it at a brightness that is brighter than the specific brightness. Display result display 20SHRE.

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the result display 20SHRE can be improved.

(Explanation regarding the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine related to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12 to 11-16. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH, there is a remaining number display regarding the remaining number of ST times in the probability variable state, and when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number, the predetermined number is notified. It is possible to display the remaining number of times notification display. The characters used for the remaining number of times display and the remaining number of times notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used to display the remaining number of times are such that the background image during the ST is not visible from the specific area. The specific characters used for the remaining number of times notification display are such that the background image during the ST can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic section 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background technology related to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-12 are diagrams illustrating background technology related to the fourth form of the feature section 20SH.

Basically, if you compare states that are advantageous to the player, such as variable probability states, time-saving states, jackpot gaming states, etc., and normal states, pachinko gaming machines are more likely to play games in normal states than during periods in which players play games in advantageous states. It is designed to last for a longer period of time.

For example, in a pachinko game machine, regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game, when the upper limit number of reservation information is stored, when the upper limit number of reservation information is not stored. It is easier to execute a shortening variation in which the variable display time is shorter than the above. In the probability variable state with time saving control, the variable winning ball device changes to the open state, so winnings are more likely to occur than in the normal state, so the shortening variation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and faster than in the normal state. It is possible to advance the game. Therefore, the period in which the game is played in the normal state is longer than the period in which the game is played in the variable probability state with time saving control.

In probability variable control, after the end of the jackpot game state, either of the following conditions is met first: when the special figure game is executed for a predetermined number of STs, or when the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot" It ends when. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "jackpot" when variable probability control is being performed, the variable probability control will end if the predetermined number of ST times of special symbol games are played. . Note that the predetermined number of times ST is, for example, 70 times.

Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time of the special symbol in the special symbol game is shortened compared to when the time saving control is not performed. Time-saving control is performed when either of the following conditions is met first: the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game state ends, or the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot". It ends when. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not result in a "jackpot" when the time saving control is being performed, the time saving control will end if the predetermined number of time saving games have been played. . Note that the predetermined number of time reductions is, for example, 70 times.

Note that the set value for the number of ST times and the set value for the number of time saving times may be different values.

When the pachinko game machine is controlled in the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the pachinko game machine may display a remaining number display regarding the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), in response to the fact that the remaining number of ST times is 30, the remaining number of times "30 times remaining" is displayed.

For displaying the remaining number of times, numbers are used to display the remaining number of ST times, and characters other than numbers are used to make it clear that the number of times remaining is displayed. The numbers used to display the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The remaining number of times display shown in Figure 11-12 (A) has the characters "remaining" and "times" to remind you that it is a remaining number of times display, and "30" to display the remaining number of ST times. The numbers and are used.

Among the characters used to display the remaining number of times, there are specific characters that form specific areas.

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine is controlled to be in a variable probability state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the ST background image is displayed in a manner that the screen appears to be cracked. The background image during ST is an image that is displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the probability change state. The ST background image contains many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The remaining number of times display is displayed in a small size in an end area that does not obstruct the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device. When the ST background image changes over time, the line of the ST background image may overlap with the back of the remaining count display. When a specific character is displayed on the remaining count display, ST When the lines of the middle image overlap, the lines of the ST middle background image are assimilated with the lines forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character.

FIG. 11-12(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-12(A). In the examples shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the line of the ST background image overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of remaining times, and the ST background image line is assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" looks like the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the characters indicating the remaining number of times are mistakenly recognized as characters different from the original characters, the remaining number of ST times in the variable probability state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line of the ST background image so that the line of the ST background image does not overlap with a specific area of a specific character.

The fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH was made in view of this background, and the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH will be described below.

(Display of remaining number of times in the fourth form of characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-13 are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH.

In the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific area 20SHI6 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times is , is a non-transparent display mode, and is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 forming characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-13, the color of the Arabic numeral line 20SHS6 used to display the remaining number of times is "black", while the specific characters "0", "4", "6", " The specific areas 20SHI6 of "8" and "9" are displayed in "white", and when displayed in front of the ST background image, the ST background image becomes invisible from the specific area 20SHI6.

Further, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the maple, but the display mode of the specific area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the maple, but the display mode of the character is Any display mode may be used as long as it has a high contrast with the display mode of the line 20SHS6 to be formed.

For example, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a high contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture with a high contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a high contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific area 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with respect to the color of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the texture of the specific area 20SHI6 may have a texture that has a lower contrast than the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Among the characters used to display the remaining number of times, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the remaining number of ST times and specific characters other than numbers to recognize that the remaining number of times are displayed are also shown in the diagram. As with the Arabic numerals 11-13, the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display manner, which is different from the display manner of the lines forming the characters.

(Remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-14 are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times notification in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH.

When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays a remaining number of times notification display that notifies the predetermined number of times.

The remaining number of times notification display includes a number to display the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times notification display. and are used. The numbers used to display the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

The remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a plurality of types with different transmittances, as shown in FIGS. 11-14. The remaining number of times notification display shown in FIG. 11-14(A) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display is not transparent, and the background of the characters cannot be seen from the line area. The remaining number of times notification display shown in FIG. 11-14(B) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display is transparent, and the background of the characters can be seen from the line area.

Further, the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in three-dimensional characters. In a display mode in which the background of the characters is not visible, the line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS71 representing the character and an area 20SHS72A representing the depth of the three-dimensional character. In a display mode where the background of the characters is transparent, the area 20SHS71 representing the characters is displayed transparently, and in a display mode where the background of the characters is not visible, it is displayed as the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the three-dimensional characters. The area is displayed as an area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are also characters that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in Figure 11-14, the specific areas of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times are shown. 20SHI7 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the ST background image, the ST background image becomes visible from the specific area 20SHI7.

As shown in FIGS. 11-14, the specific area 20SHI7 for the remaining number of times notification display is different depending on whether the remaining number of times notification is displayed in a non-transparent manner or in a transparent manner. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14, the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a non-transparent manner, and since the area of the line forming the character includes the area 20SHS72A that represents the depth of the character, the area that represents the character The area surrounded by the inner outline of 20SHS71 and the outline of area 20SHS72A representing the depth of characters located on the inner side becomes the specific area 20SHI7. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 11-14(B), the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a transparent manner, and the area 20SHS71 representing the characters is displayed transparently, so the bottom surface of the three-dimensional characters is displayed. The area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS72B becomes the specific area 20SHI7.

(How the remaining count display appears in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-15(A) is a diagram showing how the remaining count display looks in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH. FIG. 11-15(B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 11-15(A).

In the examples shown in Figures 11-15 (A) and (B), the line of the background image in ST overlaps with the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used for the remaining count display 20SHST, but the specific area Since 20SHI6 is displayed in "white", the ST background image is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI6, it is not assimilated with the line 20SHHS2 of the ST middle background image, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0".

In addition to the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the image display device 5 also displays a number of wins display 20SHK, a right-handed hit display 20SHM, and a probability variation display 20SHRU for making it clear that the probability variation state is being controlled. There is. The acquired number display 20SHK, the right hit display 20SHM, and the probability change display 20SHRU are also displayed in a small size in the edge area of the display area of the image display device 5 that does not obstruct the visibility of the decorative symbols, similarly to the remaining number display 20SHST.

The characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the variable probability display 20SHRU are the same type of characters as those used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display, and the same type of characters are used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display. It may also include characters of a different type than those shown in the text. In this embodiment, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH use "numbers", "hiragana", and "kanji" as shown in FIG. 11-17. On the other hand, the probability variation display 20SHRU uses "alphabet" which is a different type of character from the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. In addition, the acquired number display 20SHK includes "numbers", which are the same type of characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, and the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. A different type of character, ``katakana,'' is used. In addition, the right-hand display 20SHM includes "hiragana" and "kanji", which are the same types of characters used for the remaining count display 20SHST and the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH, and the remaining count display 20SHST and remaining count notification display 20SHSTH. "Symbols", which are characters of a different type from the characters used, are used.

Among the characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-hand hit display 20SHM, and the variable probability display 20SHRU, there are characters that correspond to specific characters regardless of the type of the character. Similar to the specific area 20SHI6 of the remaining count display 20SHST, the specific area of the specific character used in the acquired number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability change display 20SHRU is also in a non-transparent display mode, and the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters are Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode, the background image during ST is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6.

(Example of production operation of remaining number display and remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIGS. 11-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the feature section 20SH. FIGS. 11-17 are diagrams illustrating an example of the performance operation of displaying the remaining number of times and displaying the remaining number of times notification in the first form of the feature section 20SH.

As shown in FIG. 11-17, the effect control CPU 120 displays a remaining number display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 11-17 (A) and (B), each time the variable display is executed, the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number for displaying the remaining number of ST times in the remaining number display 20 SHST. and display it.

As shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (A) and (B), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times is started. The remaining number notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times starts to be displayed in a non-transparent display mode. For example, the performance control CPU 120 notifies the remaining number of times when a variable display is started in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, or 10 times. The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH starts to be displayed in a non-transparent display mode. As shown in FIGS. 11-17(B) to (D), the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 11-17, when the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is also displayed, but the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display in which the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed. It is displayed in a display area different from the area. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (B) to (C), when the first period has elapsed after starting the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, the production control CPU 120 The display mode of the number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changed from a non-transparent display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 and 11-17 (B) to (E), when the second period has passed after changing the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, the performance control CPU 120, The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is capable of performing variable display based on a plurality of types of variation patterns with different variable display times.

The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times. Therefore, if the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, there is a possibility that the remaining number of ST times may be misunderstood.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to be able to end the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in one variable display, the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a display mode that does not transmit the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are provided. The total period including the second period displayed in the transparent display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, in a variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variation pattern the variable display is executed based on, In the first variable display, the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be ended.

Here, the first display area 20SH51 includes the above-mentioned "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. On the other hand, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed on the front side of the identification information in at least the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first display area 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the invisible remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, there is a possibility that the display result cannot be recognized.

Therefore, in this embodiment, so that the display result of the variable display can be recognized, the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a display mode that does not transmit the variable display time is the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time. The variable display is set to end before the display result is derived.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 11-16, in a variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is a predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variation pattern the variable display is executed based on, The display result of variable display can be suitably recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-17(D), the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived, but the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changed to a transparent display mode. Since the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changing, the identification information in the background of the characters can be visually recognized from the area of the line forming the characters of the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH.

In addition, in this embodiment, the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent manner when the display result of the variable display is being derived and displayed. However, if a pseudo continuous effect is executed in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST is a predetermined number of times, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the remaining number of times is displayed. The notification display 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent manner.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH can be controlled to a variable probability state with time-saving control that allows the game to proceed faster than the normal state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display the background image during ST in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of ST times in the variable probability state on the front side of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 also provides a remaining number of times notification that notifies a predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times on the front side of the background image during ST in at least the first display area 20SH51. As the display 20SHSTH, the remaining number display 20SHSTH notifies "60" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST reaches 60, and the remaining number display 20SHSTH notifies "60" when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST reaches 50. 50" remaining number notification display 20SHSTH can be displayed. The remaining count display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed. On the other hand, the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH ends its display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it started displaying. The characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. The characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. The specific characters used in the remaining count display 20SHST are such that the ST background image is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are visible from the specific area 20SHI7 in the ST background image.

According to such a configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH including specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the background video during the ST. For example, when a player checks the remaining ST count in a variable probability state, he or she checks the remaining count display 20SHST, but the remaining count display 20SHST is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52. If the ST background image is visible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character, there is a possibility that the specific character will look different from the original character, but the ST background image cannot be seen from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character. By doing so, specific characters can be recognized accurately. Further, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not always displayed like the remaining number of times display 20SHST, but is a predetermined number to alert the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST is a predetermined number. Since it is displayed only for a limited time and is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, by making the background image visible during ST from the specific area 20SHI7 of the specific character, the first At the conspicuous display position of the display area 20SH51, it is possible to show even a small amount of the background image during the ST.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side is visible through the line portion forming the characters. be.

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be made visible while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, it is possible to avoid unnecessary stress on the player.

Further, as described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The image display device 5 can display a remaining number notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of decorative symbols can be made visible when the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, it is possible to avoid giving unnecessary stress to the player. .

Furthermore, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is being derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays it in a display mode that allows the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH to be transmitted.

According to such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls. Then, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the acquired number display 20SHK from decreasing due to the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH.

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of a stop button. It is possible.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 20SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). ), a display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. (For example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51.) and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means displays a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and the second display In the second display area 20SH52, the image display device 5 can display an award amount display regarding the amount of gaming value awarded on the front side of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display a display of the award amount of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52). (e.g., it is possible to display an acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side), and at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, the amount of game value awarded is a predetermined amount. As notification displays to notify that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount, and a first notification display to notify that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display area 20SH51, the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state on the front side of the background image during the jackpot. As the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH that informs you that the number of "Kiriban" has been reached, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the acquisition number notification display will be displayed as "1000 over". (e.g., when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "over 2000"), the award amount display is The notification display is updated every time a gaming value is given in the advantageous state (for example, the number of acquisition display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot gaming state), and the notification display is The display is ended when a specific period of time has passed since the start of the display (for example, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is to end the display when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the display, etc.), and the notification is The characters used for the display are larger in size than the characters used in the award amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquired number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK). The characters used for the grant amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the characters is formed (for example, the number of acquisitions display 20SHK and the number of acquisitions The characters used in the notification display 20SHKH include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used in the display of the amount of application include the specific characters that form the background image from the specific area. is not visible (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during the jackpot is not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used in the notification display are not visible in the specific area. It is characterized in that the background image is visible from the background image (for example, the specific characters used in the winning number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image during the jackpot is visible from a specific area).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the provision amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount displayed, but the amount displayed is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area. , if the background image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, Specific characters can be recognized accurately. In addition, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is meant to congratulate the player when the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time, and large-sized characters are displayed in a wide first display area. Therefore, by making the background image visible from a specific area of a specific character, the first display area is It becomes possible to show even a small amount of the background image at a prominent display position.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8, and 9 (for example, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", " 6, 8, 9, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the amount of application and the notification display using Arabic numerals in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means displays the notification display while displaying the award amount display (for example, the image display device 5 When the display 20SHK is displayed, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be displayed.

According to such a configuration, even when the notification display is displayed, the amount of gaming value awarded in the jackpot game state can be accurately grasped by the amount displayed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means is capable of displaying the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, an image The display device 5 may be able to display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is easily noticed by the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the display means is capable of displaying a specific display regarding the advantageous state in front of the background image in the second area; For example, in the second display area 20SH52, the image display device 5 can display a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative symbol display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, a right hit display 20SHM on the front side of the jackpot background image, etc.) , the characters used for the specific display include the same type of characters as the characters used for the provision amount display and the notification display, and the characters of a different type from the characters used for the provision amount display and the notification display. , all types of characters include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, used for jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, right hit display 20SHM). The characters include the same type of characters as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of a different type from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. 2 types of characters also include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used for the specific display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area. (For example, the specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right hit display 20SHM mean that the background image during the jackpot cannot be seen from the specific area).

According to such a configuration, the specific characters can be accurately recognized even in the specific display.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and has a display means. (For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and an area around the first display area, and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and an area around the first display area. a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51, (e.g., a second display area 20SH52 narrower than , the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a jackpot background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52), and in the second display area, the background image is displayed. (For example, in the second display area 20SH52, the image display device 5 can display a display of the amount of the gaming value that has been awarded on the front side of the background image during the jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. (e.g., the number of prize balls acquired), at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, a notification notifying that the amount of game value awarded has reached a predetermined amount; The displays include a first notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value given has reached a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of gaming value given has reached a second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during the jackpot, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban"). When the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls", it is possible to display a win number notification display that says "over 1000", and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", (e.g., when the number of award balls awarded reaches "2000 balls", it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display saying "2000 over"), the award amount display is such that when the number of prize balls awarded reaches "2000", the award amount display is such that the gaming value is increased in the advantageous state. It is updated every time a game ball is awarded (for example, the number of acquisitions display is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), and the notification display is updated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display. (For example, the display notifying the number of acquisitions ends when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the display.) The characters are larger in size than the characters used for display (for example, the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are larger than the characters used to display the number of acquisitions), and the amount displayed and The characters used in the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include lines forming the characters). (e.g., a specific area surrounded by The specific characters used for the notification display are more similar to the lines forming the characters than the specific characters used for the award amount display. The ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area is small (for example, the size of the area of the line forming the character is smaller than the specific character used to display the number of acquisitions) than the specific character used to display the number of acquisitions. (e.g., the ratio of the size of the specific area to the area is small).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the provision amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount displayed, but the amount displayed is displayed in small-sized characters in the narrow second display area. , if the background image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the characters used for the notification display are three-dimensional characters (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are three-dimensional characters), and the three-dimensional characters are The line area to be formed may include an area for expressing characters and an area for expressing the depth of the characters.

According to such a configuration, the presentation effect of the notification display can be enhanced.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used for the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display). The background image during the jackpot may be visible from the specific area 20SHI3, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is displayed when the award amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period to bless people, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the area of the lines forming the characters. Since the background image is small, it is possible to not only reduce the risk of misrecognizing the characters even if the background image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, but also increase the production effect by making the background image visible from a specific area of a specific character. can be increased.

(9) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used in the notification display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, in the acquisition number notification display in Modification 1). The specific characters used may be such that the background image is not visible during the jackpot from the specific area 20SHI4, etc.).

According to this configuration, the acquisition number notification display is not always displayed in the jackpot game state like the acquisition number display, but when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches the number of "Kiriban" It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time to congratulate the player when the player has played, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, with a specific area corresponding to the size of the line area forming the characters. Since the proportion of the size of the character is small, it is possible to not only suppress the sense of discomfort even if the background image is not visible from a specific area of a specific character, but also to suppress the sense of discomfort even if the background image is not visible from a specific area of a specific character. This can prevent misunderstandings.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the display means is capable of changing the mode of the notification display to a specific mode (for example, the image display device 5 displays the number of acquired (such as that the notification display 20SHKH can be displayed by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51), and when the specific period has elapsed since the notification display mode changed to the specific mode, the notification display mode is changed. Change the mode to a mode different from the specific mode (for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is brought into frame to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is made to frame out) ), you may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above, the characters used for the notification display are displayed in a plurality of colors in the line area forming the characters (for example, a modification example regarding the second form of the characteristic part 20SH). The characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in 2 are displayed in a gradation of three colors in the line area forming the characters, etc.), and the display means changes the combination of the plurality of colors over time. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the character format used for displaying the acquisition number notification in the following manner: display format A → display format B → display format C → display format D → display format E → display format F → display mode G→display mode A→..., etc.), when the notification display is displayed in the specific mode, and when it is displayed in a different mode from the specific mode. The speed at which the combination of the plurality of colors changes differs depending on when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 (for example, when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and when the number of acquisitions notification display is The display mode of the acquisition number notification display may change at a different speed depending on when the player is moving (frame-in/frame-out), etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the display mode changes depending on the moving speed of the notification display, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state where the game can proceed faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.). The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, an image display device The display area of No. 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), and the display means is , in the first display area and the second display area, a background image corresponding to the special state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52). , a background image during ST, etc.), and in the second display area, a variation number display regarding the number of variations in the special state can be displayed on the front side of the background image (for example, an image display device 5 is that in the second display area 20SH52, a remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state can be displayed on the front side of the ST background image, etc.), at least in the first display area, A frequency notification display is displayed on the front side of the background image to notify the number of fluctuations when the value of the fluctuation frequency display reaches a predetermined value, and the number of fluctuations is notified when the value of the fluctuation frequency display reaches a first predetermined value. It is possible to display a first number of times notification display and a second number of times notification display that notifies the number of changes when the value of the number of changes display reaches a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least the first number of times notification display). 1 display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during ST, a remaining number display 20SHST is displayed as a remaining number display 20SHST to notify the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number. The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH notifies you of ``60'' when the number of remaining times shown by the remaining number of times reaches 60, and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH notifies you of ``50'' when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times shown by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50 times. ), and the variable number display is updated every time the variable display is executed (for example, the remaining number display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed). , the number of times notification display ends displaying when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of display (for example, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends displaying when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since it started displaying). The characters used for the number of times notification display are larger than the characters used for the number of fluctuations display (for example, the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are the same as those used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST). The characters used for the variable number display and the number notification display include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed ( For example, the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), and the specific characters used for the variable number display include a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc. The background video is not visible (for example, the specific characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST are such that the background video is not visible during ST from the specific area 20SHI6), and the specific characters used for the number of times notification display are is characterized in that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH indicate that the background image during ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI7). do.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the variation count display and the count notification display including the specific character in relation to the background image. For example, when checking the number of fluctuations in a special state, the player checks the fluctuation number display, but the fluctuation number display is displayed in small sized characters in a narrow second display area, and the number of fluctuations is displayed in small sized characters in a narrow second display area. If the background image is visible, there is a possibility that the specific character will look different from the original character, but by making the background image invisible from a specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be recognized accurately. be able to. In addition, the number notification display is not displayed all the time like the fluctuating number of times display, but is displayed only during a specific period to alert players that the remaining number of times indicated by the fluctuating number of times display will reach a predetermined number of times. Since the characters are displayed in large size in the wide first display area, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific character, in the conspicuous display position of the first display area, It becomes possible to show even a small amount of the background image.

(13) In the gaming machine according to (12) above, the display means is capable of displaying the characters used for the number of times notification display in a transparent manner in which an image on the back side can be seen through the area of the line forming the characters. (For example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side is visible through the line part forming the characters. etc).

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be made visible when the number of times notification display is displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being given to the player.

(14) In the gaming machine according to (13) above, the first display area includes a variable display area in which identification information is displayed variably (for example, the first display area 20SH51 includes "left", "middle", In the variable display area, the display means can display the number of times notification display on the front side of the identification information (for example, , the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the variable display of the identification information can be made visible while the number of times notification display is being displayed, it is possible to avoid giving unnecessary stress to the player.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above, when the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner, the display means displays the number of times notification display in the transparent mode (for example, the image display device 5 If the display result is derived and displayed, display it in a display mode that allows the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH to be transmitted, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even if the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner while displaying the number of times notification display, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (15) above, the display means is capable of displaying an amount display regarding the amount of the gaming value that has been provided (for example, the image display device 5 is , an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of prize balls awarded), and displaying the number of times notification display in a display area different from the display area where the award amount display is displayed (for example, an image display The device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the application amount display from decreasing due to the display of the number of times notification display.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the feature section 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state). ), a display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. (For example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51.) and a second display area 20SH52 which is narrower than the first display area 20SH51), and the display means is configured to display information indicating that the advantageous state is progressing in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 can display a first background image corresponding to the progress of a round game in a jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and second display area 20SH52. (for example, the image display device 5 can display a second background image corresponding to the end of the advantageous state at least in the first display area). In the first display area 20SH51, it is possible to display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc.), when the second background image is not displayed, in the second display area, the In front of the first background image, it is possible to display a specific suggestion image that gives a suggestion regarding the progress of the game (for example, the image display device 5 can display a specific suggestion image in the second display area 20SH52 when the ending background image is not displayed). , on the front side of the jackpot background image, it is possible to display an effect image 20SHE of a pending consecutive game preview indicating that the jackpot game state will be controlled in accordance with the stored pending information, etc.), In the second display area, in the front side of the first background image, it is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the awarded gaming value (for example, the image display device 5 can display, in the second display area 20SH52, (e.g., it is possible to display an acquisition number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded prize balls on the front side of the background image during a jackpot), when the second background image is displayed, at least in the first display area, On the front side of the second background image, it is possible to display a result notification display that informs the amount of gaming value awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 can display a result notification display when the ending background image is displayed). (e.g., it is possible to display a result display 20SHRE that informs the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state on the front side of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51 when The characters used for the display are larger in size than the characters used for the award amount display (for example, the characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). etc.), and the characters used in the award amount display and the result notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the characters is formed (for example, in the acquired number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE). The characters used include a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by a line forming the character is formed, etc.), and the specific character used for the display of the amount of application is determined from the specific area to the first background image and the previous period. The specific suggestion video is not visible (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, the background video during the jackpot and the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive winnings preview are not visible from the specific area, etc.) The specific characters used in the result notification display are such that the second background video is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are such that the ending background video is visible from the specific area 20SHI5). (e.g.).

According to such a configuration, the provision amount display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the first background video and the specific suggestion video, and the result notification display including the specific characters can be suitably displayed in relation to the second background video. can be suitably displayed in relation to For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the amount displayed, but the amount displayed is displayed in small sized characters in the narrow second display area, and the amount displayed is Since it may overlap with the suggested image, if the first background image or specific suggested image is visible from a specific area of a specific character, the specific character may appear to be a different character from the original character. By making the jackpot background image and the specific suggestion image invisible from the specific area, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result notification display is displayed in large-sized characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestion video, so by making the second background video visible from the specific area of the specific characters, It becomes possible to show at least a little of the second background image in the prominent display position of the first display area.

(18) In the gaming machine of (17) above, a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot winning probability (such as being able to set any one of a plurality of different setting values "1" to "6"), and the display means indicates the setting value set by the setting means. The second background video can be displayed in a manner that suggests the set value (for example, the image display device 5 can display the ending background video in a manner that suggests the set value), and the specific suggestion video is This is an aspect of a plurality of types of suggestion videos that make suggestions regarding the advantageous state, and do not suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive winnings preview predicts the reliability of the jackpot). Although this is one of multiple types of preview effects, setting suggestion effects based on pending continuous play notices should not be executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the setting value is suggested by the second background image, so the significance of the second background image being visible from the specific area of the specific character used for displaying the result notification. increases.

(19) In the gaming machine of (17) or (18) above, the display means starts displaying the second background image at a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 displays the ending background image at a predetermined brightness). (such as starting display of an image), at the timing of starting display of the result notification display, the second background image is temporarily stopped and displayed at a specific brightness that is darker than the predetermined brightness, and Display the result notification display at a brightness that is brighter than the brightness (for example, the image display device 5 pauses the ending background video at a specific brightness that is lower than a predetermined brightness at timing T3 when starting to display the result display 20SHRE) and displaying the result display 20SHRE at a brightness brighter than a specific brightness, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the result notification display can be improved.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 19SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the feature section 19SH will be explained with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 19SH displays the number of prize balls awarded when a game ball enters the jackpot slot in the jackpot gaming state, and the number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to display the expected number of balls to be acquired regarding the total number of balls awarded. Further, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the display of the expected number of wins invisible or difficult when an over-win occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the expected number of acquisitions display when the display of the expected number of acquisitions becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over winning performance before the display of the expected number of wins becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 19SH having such features will be described. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Production operation when a winning occurs during a round game)
FIG. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation when a winning occurs during a round game. FIG. 12-2 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 12-1(A), the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment displays the number of acquisitions as 20SHK when the jackpot game state is controlled, and the game ball is placed in the jackpot slot in the jackpot game state. An acquired number display 20SHK1 regarding the number of prize balls awarded by entering the game, and an expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 regarding the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state are displayed. In the example shown in Figure 12-1 (A), the acquisition number display 20SHK is separated by the middle bracket "/", such as "135/1500", and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 with "135" in the numerator is "135/1500". It is displayed in the format of a fraction, with the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 having "1500" in the denominator. That is, the acquired number display 20SHK shown in FIG. 12-1(A) indicates that the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the jackpot slot in the jackpot game state is 135 balls, and the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is 135 balls. This shows that the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded is 1,500.

Also in this embodiment, the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5, and the second display area 20SH52 includes a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative symbol display 20SHZ, and a round number display 20SHR. , the right-handed indication 20SHM is also displayed. Further, on the image display device 5, a jackpot background image in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed in correspondence with the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state. Note that the background image during the jackpot is displayed on a display layer arranged on the back side of the display layer where the winning number display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 12-2.

When a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters the jackpot in the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings in the performance mode shown in FIGS. 12-1 (B) to (F). Update the value of 20SHK.

When a prize ball is awarded when a game ball enters the big prize opening in the jackpot game state, first, as shown in FIG. The display of the effect display is started in the display area near the position of the variable winning ball device 7. Here, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is arranged at the lower right position of the image display device 5 when viewed from the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1(B), an effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right end of the display area of the image display device 5. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF whose display has started at the lower right end of the display area is displayed. moving towards the top of the area. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 12-2, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer placed in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible, but as shown in FIG. 12-2 (D), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

In the example shown in Figure 12-1 (D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, so the acquisition number display 20SHK is no longer visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is recognized. A part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible as long as it is impossible to do so. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to see.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 12-1 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-2 (D) to (E). As a result, when the number of acquisitions display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 is updated. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 12-1 (D) to (E) and 12-2 (D) to (E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-1(F). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (F), the acquisition number display 20SHK is now visible as the effect display 20SHEF has finished displaying, and it is possible to confirm that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 has been updated. can.

According to such a production mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby attracting attention to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. When this happens, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 that has been noticed has been updated.

(Example of production operation when over-winning occurs)
FIG. 12-3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an over-win occurs. FIG. 12-4 is a diagram illustrating an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled so that when the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole in one round game, the big winning hole is closed. A so-called over-win may occur in which the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole following the 10th game ball. When an over-win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the number of wins display 20SHK according to the performance mode as shown in FIG. 12-3.

When an over-win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 first forms a big winning opening, as shown in FIGS. The effect display starts to be displayed in the display area near the position of the special variable winning ball device 7. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(B), an effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right end of the display area of the image display device 5. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF, which has started displaying at the lower right end of the display area, is displayed. moving towards the top of the area. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (C), the performance control CPU 120 controls the effect display 20SHEF to display the number of acquisitions 20SHK before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK. To start an over-winning presentation that notifies the occurrence of an over-winning before it becomes invisible or difficult to see. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), an over winning effect video in which the character CHCB appears is displayed on the image display device 5.

Note that the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance using another performance device as an over winning performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the effect control CPU 120 outputs an over-win sound different from the normal winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R as an over-win effect. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the over winning sound of "picone picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 may cause the attacker lamp 9c to emit light in a light emission mode different from the sound at the time of normal winning as an over winning performance.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 12-4, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer placed in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible, but as shown in FIG. 12-4(D), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

In the example shown in Figure 12-3 (D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, so the acquisition number display 20SHK is no longer visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is recognized. A part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible as long as it is impossible to do so. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to see.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 12-3 (D) to (E) and FIGS. 12-4 (D) to (E). As a result, when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. In the examples shown in Figures 12-3 (D) to (E) and Figures 12-4 (D) to (E), the value of acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the expected acquisition number display is The value of 20SHK2 has been updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-3(F). In the example shown in Figure 12-3 (F), the acquisition number display 20SHK is now visible as the effect display 20SHEF has finished displaying, and the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 have been updated. You can confirm that.

According to such a production mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby attracting attention to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. By updating the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number is When the display 20SHK becomes visible, it is possible to suitably make the user recognize that the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2, which have been attracting attention, have been updated.

In particular, when an over-win occurs, not only the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 but also the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, so the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state is It is possible to suitably make the player recognize that the number of prize balls has increased by the number of prize balls received.

After ending the display of the effect display 20SHEF, the performance control CPU 120 ends the over winning performance, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (G). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (G), the display of the over winning effect video that was being displayed on the image display device 5 as an over winning effect has ended, and a jackpot background image in which the character 20SHCA appears is now displayed.

(Suggestion of setting based on over-winning performance)
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table according to the set value. The setting value consists of 6 levels from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball payout rate, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6" In the order of , the larger the value, the higher the ball payout rate. In other words, when "1" is set as the setting value, it is the least advantageous for the player, and as the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", The advantage increases gradually. In this embodiment, the set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to change the setting value, and to be able to execute the above-mentioned over winning effect as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is low, the performance control CPU 120 displays an over winning performance video in which the character CHCB appears on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. The over winning sound of "Picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the setting value is set to high, the performance control CPU 120 displays an over winning performance video in which the character CHCC appears on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. The over-winning sound "Peep-Paw" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Note that the setting suggestion effect based on the over-winning effect does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the set value is set low, an over winning effect as shown in Figure 12-5 (B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the set value is set high In addition, an over-winning effect as shown in FIG. 12-5(A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

Further, the over winning performance may have different performance modes depending on whether the set value is "6", which is the most advantageous for the player, or when the set value is not "6". Further, the over winning effect may have different effects depending on whether the set value is an odd number or the set value is an even number.

(If there is a round in which the specified number of prizes was not won and a round in which over-wins occurred)
FIG. 11-6 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation in the characteristic section 19SH when there is a round in which the predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred.

As mentioned above, the open state of the jackpot game state continues until the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot hole reaches a predetermined number, whichever is earlier. .

In the example shown in Figures 12-6 (A) and (B), in one round of the round game, there were 9 winnings, but before the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have elapsed, one round of the round game has ended, and a second round of the round game has started. In this example, as shown in Figure 12-6 (B), in response to the fact that 9 prizes were won during one round, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed as "135/1500". ing. In this example, the explanation will be made assuming that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which a 10-round round game is executed is 1500 balls.

Then, in the 2nd round of the round game, the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10 and the 2nd round of the round game ended, and in the 3rd round of the round game, there were also 10 prizes. shall be. That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third round games. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435", as shown in FIG. 12-6(C).

It is assumed that an over winning occurs in the three rounds of the round game. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-6(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and while the effect display 20SHEF is moving, the over winning effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-6(E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquisition number display The value of 20SHK is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-6(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

It is assumed that the number of game balls entering the grand prize opening reaches 10 in each round game of 4th round to 10th round, and the round game of each round ends. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the fourth round to "1500", as shown in FIG. 12-6 (G).

When all 10 rounds of round games are completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in Figure 12-6 (H), and the result display 20SH shows that the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is 1500 balls. This will be announced.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed was 1500 balls, but since over-winning occurred in 3 rounds of round games, the final The value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is "1515". However, since only nine prizes were won in one round of the round game, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is not "1515" but "1500".

According to this embodiment, if there is a round in which the predetermined number of winnings is not won and a round in which over-winning occurs, the value of the number of winnings display 20SHK1 is smaller than the value of the expected number of winnings display 20SHK2. By checking the final winning number display 20SHK, it is easy to see that there was a round in which the predetermined number of prizes was not won, and that there was a round in which over-winning occurred.

FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing another example of the production operation in the characteristic section 19SH when there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and a round in which over-wins occurred.

In the example shown in Figures 12-7 (A) and (B), in one round of the round game, there were 9 winnings, but before the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have elapsed, one round of the round game has ended, and a second round of the round game has started. In this example, as shown in Figure 12-7 (B), in response to the fact that 9 prizes were won during one round, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed as "135/1500". ing. In this example, the explanation will be made assuming that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which a 10-round round game is executed is 1500 balls.

Then, in the 2nd round of the round game, the number of game balls that entered the grand prize opening reached 10 and the 2nd round of the round game ended, and in the 3rd round of the round game, there were also 10 prizes. shall be. That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third round games. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 12-7(C).

It is assumed that an over winning occurs in the three rounds of the round game. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-7(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and while the effect display 20SHEF is moving, the over winning effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-7 (E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult, the acquisition number display 20SHEF becomes invisible or difficult. The value of 20SHK1 is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-7(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 has been updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 has not been updated and remains at "1500".

It is assumed that the number of game balls entering the grand prize opening reaches 10 in each round game of 4th round to 10th round, and the round game of each round ends. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the fourth round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 12-7 (G).

When all 10 rounds of round games are completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in Figure 12-7 (H), and the result display 20SH shows that the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is 1500 balls. This will be announced.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed was 1500, but over-winning occurred in 3 rounds of round games. However, the value of the final expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since only nine prizes were won in one round of the round game, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to this embodiment, when there is a round in which a predetermined number of prizes are not won and a round in which over-wins occur, a sense of incongruity is prevented from occurring due to the values of the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2. be able to.

As explained above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the feature section 19SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a special variable winning ball device 7 that can change between an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed to a closed state when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to be in the jackpot game state. . Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a performance control CPU 120 that can execute an over winning performance when an over winning performance occurs in one round game. Then, the image display device 5 displays an acquisition number display 20SHK1 regarding the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, and an acquisition number display 20SHK1 regarding the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state. A scheduled number display 20SHK2 can be displayed. Further, the image display device 5 can display an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see when an over-win occurs. Further, the image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over winning performance before the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, the user feels more uncomfortable than when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated while the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is made visible. can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance using the image display device 5 and a performance using the speakers 8L and 8R as an over winning performance.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the over winning performance.

Further, as described above, when the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and displays the effect display. 20SHEF is moved to make the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the fact that a game ball has entered the special variable prize winning device 7 can be expressed by the display effect on the image display device 5, and the interest can be improved. In addition, the effect display 20SHEF makes not only the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 but also the acquisition number display 20SHK1 invisible or difficult to see, so that it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort.

In addition, as described above, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed. When the effect display 20SHEF reaches the area, it becomes invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 naturally come into view. Therefore, due to the attention paid to the effect display 20SHEF, attention can also be drawn to the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 in the state before the value is updated.

Furthermore, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over-winning performance before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 are displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it possible to recognize in advance that an over-win has occurred by executing the over-win presentation, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated. It can be suppressed more effectively.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set any one of a plurality of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. Then, the image display device 5 can execute the over-winning effect in a manner that suggests the set value.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the over-winning presentation.

Further, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 ends the over winning performance after the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends.

According to such a configuration, the updated value of the expected number of acquisitions display 20SHK2 becomes visible while the over-winning presentation continues, so that the feeling of discomfort caused by the update of the expected number of acquisitions display 20SHK2 becomes visible. can be suppressed more effectively.

(Modified example regarding characteristic part 19SH)
The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like, the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding error detection codes and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for playing the game, but also the state of the backup flag and error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage, the CPU 103 will be able to resume the game played before the power outage after the power outage is restored by executing the power supply outage process. Can be continued.

On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 does not back up various data for proceeding with the performance. Therefore, the performance control CPU 120 cannot continue the performance based on the information on the game before the power outage after the power outage is restored.

For example, if power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like during a round game, the effect control CPU 120 will not execute the effect corresponding to the round game after the power is restored. In that case, the production control CPU 120 may display the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 in the round game after the power outage has been restored, or display specific information such as "????/????" The acquired number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquired number display 20SHK2 are displayed without displaying the values. In addition, even if a winning occurs in the round game after the power outage is restored, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the effect display 20SHEF because the image display device 5 is not executing the performance corresponding to the round game. . On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 can identify that an over-win has occurred in one round of the round game after the power outage has been restored, the performance control CPU 120 will not execute the over-win performance using the image display device 5, but will use the speakers 8L and 8R. It is possible to perform an over winning effect using the attacker lamp 9c. Note that the production control CPU 120 can specify that an over-win has occurred, for example, by using a production control command that notifies the player of an over-win.

According to such a configuration, in a situation where the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power outage is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed, so that a feeling of discomfort does not occur. On the other hand, if an over-win occurs, it can be notified to that effect.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and the display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), a variable state that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game medium to win. winning means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can change between an open state in which the game ball can easily win a prize and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win a prize), control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to be in the advantageous state (for example, a pachinko machine); The gaming machine 1 is equipped with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed to a closed state when controlled to be in a jackpot game state, etc.) , a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance when more than a predetermined number of game media win the variable prize winning means in the first round game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the first round game); (e.g., comprising a performance control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-win performance when an over-win performance occurs), and the display means is configured to display a prize that is awarded when the game medium wins the variable prize-winning means. It is possible to display a first award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value and a second award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value scheduled to be awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 , an acquisition number display 20SHK1 regarding the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and an expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 regarding the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot game state. displayable, etc.), and when more game media than the predetermined number win a prize in the variable winning means, it is possible to display a specific display that makes the second award amount display invisible or difficult (for example, The image display device 5 is capable of displaying an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-win occurs, and the second award amount display is made visible by the specific display. When it becomes impossible or difficult, the image display device 5 updates the value of the second grant amount display (for example, when the expected acquisition amount display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, the image display device 5 updates the value of the second grant amount display. , updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF, etc.), the specific effect execution means starts the specific effect (updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF, etc.) before the second grant amount display becomes invisible or difficult due to the specific display. The CPU 120 is characterized by starting the over-winning presentation before the expected winning number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the second application amount display is updated, a feeling of discomfort occurs when the value of the second application amount display is updated, compared to when the value of the second application amount display is updated while the second application amount display is made visible. can be suppressed.

(2) The gaming machine of (1) above includes an audio output means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the specific effect execution means is configured to perform the specific effect as the specific effect. It is possible to perform a performance by the display means and a performance by the audio output means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance by the image display device 5 and a performance by the speakers 8L and 8R as an over winning performance). be feasible, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the performance effect of the specific performance can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area close to the variable winning means when the game medium enters the variable winning means. Then, the specific display is moved to make the first award amount display and the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see (for example, the image display device 5 shows that the game ball has won a prize in the special variable winning ball device 7). At this time, the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started in the display area near the special variable winning ball device 7, and the effect display 20SHEF is moved to make the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to express the fact that a game ball has entered the variable prize winning means through a display effect on the display means, and it is possible to improve interest. Moreover, since not only the second application amount display but also the first application amount display becomes invisible or difficult due to the specific display, it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, the first award amount display and the second award amount display are visible when the specific display is moving, and the first award amount display and the second award amount display are visible when the specific display is moving. When the specific display reaches the display area where the second grant amount display is displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed when the effect display 20SHEF is moved. (for example, when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see).

According to such a configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area where the first application amount display and the second application amount display are displayed, the first application amount display and the second application amount display automatically come into view. Therefore, due to the attention to the specific display, attention can also be drawn to the first grant amount display and the second grant amount display in the state before the value is updated.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (4) above, the specific performance execution means is configured to perform Start a specific performance (for example, the performance control CPU 120 starts an over winning performance before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of acquisitions display 20SHK1 and the number of expected acquisitions display 20SHK2 are displayed) .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that more than a predetermined number of game media have been won by the variable winning means by executing the specific performance, so that the second award amount display is updated. It is possible to more effectively suppress the feeling of discomfort that occurs when

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, a setting means (for example, a pachinko game The machine 1 is capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities, and the specific performance execution means is configured to The specific effect can be executed in a manner that suggests the set value set by the means (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of executing the over winning effect in a manner that suggests the set value set). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the specific performance.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) above, the specific performance execution means ends the specific performance after the display of the specific display ends (for example, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the effect display 20SHEF to After the competition ends, the over-winning performance must be ended, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the updated value of the second grant amount display becomes visible while the specific performance continues, so that the feeling of discomfort caused by the second grant amount display being updated can be avoided. , can be suppressed more effectively.

(Other examples of transition to time saving state)
In addition, in each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modifications, the transition to the time-saving state is exemplified in such a manner that the transition to the time-saving state is made through a jackpot state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 always operates. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state may be entered without operating the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbol or may be a part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for small winning symbols, a random number for jackpot lottery determination, a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same. However, the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether you use a special random number or another random number, the timing when winning a prize in the starting opening is good.

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers are used, the winning value will be the lottery result using the special random numbers, and if small-hit pattern random numbers are used for time-saving symbols, the winning value will be the specific small-winning symbol. When a random number is used as a winning value and a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used for a time-saving symbol lottery, the random number for a fall lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. A time-saving area may be provided inside the device 7, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as the winning of the time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the lottery of time-saving symbols is carried out using a structure and when the small winning symbol uses the time-saving symbols together, the variable display count of the time-saving state is made not to change depending on whether or not the time-saving region is passed.

In addition, regarding winning when a time-saving symbol is drawn, if a winning symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific winning symbol is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be the timing after the jackpot determination. Incidentally, the time saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time saving state or the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state, no matter which random number value is used for the lottery. However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time saving state, whether the number of time saving times is reset or the lottery is not drawn may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, there can be a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value and each gaming state. Further, the time-saving granting conditions can be made different for each time-saving symbol.

Further, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbols, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbols can be changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

Moreover, a lottery result of "time saving number of times" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

Alternatively, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end symbol may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after winning a jackpot, it is in a high probability low base state when the gaming hall opens, and the high probability low base state is displayed for a specified number of times. After the variable display has been executed and ended, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can perform a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a jackpot gaming state). The display area has a display area that can display images, and the display area displays game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and decorative patterns). A display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I or the second interface image 006SG005J) of a small pattern with a smaller display area than the ), a storage means (for example, CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information; Multiple display layers on which images based on data can be placed (for example, layer 1 image drawing area, layer 2 image drawing area, layer 3 image drawing area, displacement image creation area, display image creation area, etc. shown in Figure 16-5) an image processing means (for example, a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and combining each image arranged in the plurality of display layers, and the display area; a display area of the display means (for example, a portion where the production control CPU 120 executes the variable display processing shown in FIGS. 16-17) capable of executing a production of displaying the specific image on the display area of the display means. includes a first display area and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is a display area 20SH51, and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51); In the second display area, a background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52). (e.g., images can be displayed on the image display device 5), and in the second display area, an amount display regarding the amount of gaming value that has been provided can be displayed on the front side of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 In the second display area 20SH52, an acquired number display 20SHK regarding the number of award balls awarded can be displayed on the front side of the background image, etc.), at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image. The first notification display notifies that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount, and (For example, the image display device 5 can display a jackpot display on the front side of the background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. As the acquired number notification display 20SHKH that informs that the number of prize balls awarded in the game state has reached the number of "Kiriban", when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", " It is possible to display a number-of-acquisition notification display that says "over 1000", and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", it is possible to display a display that displays the number of acquisitions that says "over 2000". etc.), and the notification display can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display the information display in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52). The award amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition amount display 20SHK is displayed when the game ball is in the jackpot game state). The notification display is updated every time it is paid out as a prize ball, etc.), and the notification display ends the display when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH starts displaying. (such as ending the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the acquisition), and the characters used for the notification display are larger in size than the characters used for the award amount display (for example, the acquisition amount notification display 20SHKH). The characters used for the acquisition amount display 20SHK must be larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition amount display 20SHK, etc.), and the characters used for the award amount display and the notification display must be a specific character surrounded by lines forming the characters. Contains a specific character that forms an area (for example, the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the character) , the specific character used to display the grant amount indicates that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number display 20SHK indicates that the background image is not visible from the specific area). etc.), and the specific characters used in the notification display indicate that the background video is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH indicate that the background video is visible from the specific area). ), the storage means changes the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area from a first position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5). It is possible to store display position displacement information for displacing the display to a second position different from the first position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, a position above or below the display area of the image display device 5). , the CGROM 205 is a portion in which data of a displacement image is stored), and the image processing means displaces the specific image placed in the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information. It is possible to generate a displacement specific image (for example, as shown in Figure 16-23, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to determine the displacement target). By creating an image and applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, the images of the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R are moved upward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. (a part that creates an image in which the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward), the effect execution means is configured to move the image of the middle area 006SG005C downward while displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG) to be displayed in the display area, and the display image of the game-related information is displayed with priority in the display area over the specific display layer. (For example, as shown in Figure 16-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority.) (part) including gaming machines.

According to such a configuration, a display including a specific character can be suitably displayed in relation to a background image. Further, the notification display is easily noticed by the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount. In addition, a displacement specific image in which at least a part of a specific image displayed in a predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in a specific effect. A specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data than when image data of a specific image is exclusively stored. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from decreasing when a specific performance is executed.

In other words, the background image is not visible from the specific area surrounded by the lines forming the characters, and the characters used for the notification display are larger than the characters used to display the amount of application, and the characters in the specific area Since the background image is visible from the background image, the dispensed amount can be displayed in small fonts, making it easy to check at all times, while the notification display can display the fact that the predetermined amount has been reached in large fonts without hiding the background image. A specific performance can be executed with a small amount of data, and when the specific performance is executed, visibility of a display image of game-related information can be prevented from decreasing. In other words, when installed in a game parlor, it is easy for players to grasp the amount of game value provided, and it is easy to recognize when a predetermined amount has been reached, and specific effects are reduced without reducing the visibility of the display image of game-related information. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be executed using a small amount of data.

Furthermore, it is possible to display a display containing specific characters in a suitable manner in relation to the background image, and it is also possible to execute a specific effect with a small amount of data, while reducing the visibility of the display image of game-related information. An example of a gaming machine that can prevent this is a gaming machine that can perform variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine), that has a display area that can display an image, and that has a display area that can display an image. A display image (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I) of game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, the number of stored first special symbols, the number of second reserved special symbols, and small symbols whose display area is smaller than the decorative symbols) is displayed in the area. and a second interface image 006SG005J), a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area, and a display image of the game-related information. (e.g., CGROM 205), and a plurality of display layers (e.g., layer 1 image drawing area and layer 2 image shown in FIG. 16-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged. drawing area, layer 3 image drawing area, displacement image creation area, display image creation area, etc.), and generates an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers. possible image processing means (for example, the display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210), and effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is variable as shown in FIGS. 16-17) capable of executing the effect of displaying the specific image in the display area. a part that executes rendering processing during display), and the storage means sets the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area to a first position (for example, if it is a characteristic part 006SG, the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (for example, in the case of characteristic part 006SG, an upper position or lower position of the display area of the image display device 5). Displacement information can be stored (for example, the CGROM 205 stores displacement image data), and the image processing means displays the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data. It is possible to generate a displacement specific image that is displaced based on positional displacement information (for example, as shown in Figure 16-23, a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area) can be generated. By superimposing the background image to create a displacement target image and applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, the left area 006SG005L is displayed as the display image displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. and a part that creates an image in which the image of the right area 006SG005R moves upward and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward), the effect execution means executes the displacement identification generated by the image processing means. It is possible to perform a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG) that is displayed in the display area during variable display of an image, and the display image of the game-related information is such that the arranged image is higher than the specific display layer. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J have the highest image display priority. (portions drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area) gaming machines. Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 13 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 13(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 13(B) shows a configuration example of the first special symbol display result determination table used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 13(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 13(A).

As shown in FIG. 13(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the set value of the variable special figure in the second special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 13(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 14, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the previous setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 15, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S90174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 006SG in embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic part 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be explained.

The gaming machine of form A1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can perform variable display,
It has a display area that can display images, and the display area contains game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, the number of reserved special symbols, the number of reserved special symbols, and the small display area that is smaller than the decorative symbols). a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a pattern);
a storage means (for example, CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
A plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area shown in FIG. 16-5) etc.), and is capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (for example, display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display performance process shown in FIGS. 16-17);
Equipped with
The storage means changes the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area from a first position (for example, in the case of characteristic part 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. can store display position displacement information for displacing to a different second position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, the CGROM 205 can store display position displacement information (the part where image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image placed in the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-23). A displacement target image is created by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. the part that creates the image),
The effect executing means is configured to display a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG, a reach suggestion in the modified example 006SG-1) that displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display. performance, revival performance in modification example 006SG-2, look-ahead preview performance in modification example 006SG-3, promotion performance in modification example 006SG-5, temporary stop suggestion performance and temporary stop notification performance in modification example 006SG-6). be,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display position of the specific image can be changed from the first position to the first position by simply using the image data for displaying the specific image in the display area and the display position displacement information for displacing the display position of the specific image. Since the specific effect can be executed by displacing the image to two positions, the amount of data stored in the storage means for executing the specific effect can be reduced compared to the case where the specific effect is executed using dedicated image data. .

The gaming machine of form A2 is the gaming machine described in form A1,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer where the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-26, the first interface Image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J are parts drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a specific effect is executed, the display position of the game-related information together with at least some of the specific images is not displaced, so that the game-related information is difficult for the player to see when the specific effect is executed. You can prevent this from happening.

The gaming machine of form A3 is the gaming machine described in form A2,
At least some of the game-related information is displayed in an area that overlaps with the displacement specific image (for example, the second interface image 006SG005J is the image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion presentation). duplicate parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position and becomes the displaced specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed overlapping with the displaced specific image, so the player feels that something is wrong. You can recognize game-related information without any problems.

The gaming machine of form A4 is the gaming machine according to form A2,
At least some of the game-related information is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area during the development suggestion presentation). (a portion displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with each image of area 006SG005R),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position and becomes a displacement specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed so as not to overlap with the displacement specific image, so the player can accurately can recognize game-related information.

The gaming machine of form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A2 to A4,
Comprising gaming identification information variable display execution means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 3) capable of variably displaying the gaming identification information (for example, special symbols). ,
The performance execution means is
In a first area within the display area, it is possible to perform variable display of performance identification information in accordance with the variable display of the game identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-21, the image display device 5 (In the center of the display area, a portion where a decorative pattern can be displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern),
In a second area that is different from the first area in the display area and is smaller than the first area, it is possible to variably display the reduced identification information in accordance with the variable display of the gaming identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-21, in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, a portion where small symbols can be displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of special symbols),
The display image of the performance identification information is arranged in the specific display layer, and changes from a first visibility state to a second visibility state that is less visible to the player than the first visibility state according to execution of the specific performance. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 16-21 and 16-23, the decorative pattern is drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern is displayed on the image display device 5. areas where visibility decreases when moving upward or downward from the center of the display area),
The display image of the reduced identification information is arranged in the special display layer, and the visibility state does not change from the first visibility state according to the execution of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-21 and 16-23). As shown, the small designs are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative designs, they do not move from the top right of the display area of the image display device 5 when performing the development suggestion effect, so the visibility is not reduced. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visual recognition state of the performance identification information changes from the first visual recognition state to the second visual recognition state by executing a specific performance, so that the performance effect of the specific performance can be improved, and the performance can be reduced by executing the specific performance. Since the visible state of the identification information does not change from the first visible state, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the reduced identification information even during execution of a specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A5,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, the upper area 006SG005T shown in FIG. 16-31) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, the lower area shown in FIG. 16-31). 006SG005B),
The performance execution means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. (a portion where a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the area), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displacement specific image (for example, As shown in 16-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
When displacing the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area, the first specific display area and the second specific display area are moved at the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area. 2 Displaying an effect image different from the image displayed in the specific display area (for example, cutting effect image 006SG005S shown in FIG. 16-31);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to more effectively make the player recognize the displacement of the specific image to the second position as a specific effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A7 is the gaming machine described in form A6,
The effect execution means is capable of displacing the first specific display area in a first direction as a displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific effect; The display area can be displaced in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction (for example, as shown in FIG. (as shown in FIG. 16-31(E), the part that moves the upper region 006SG005T upward and the lower region 006SG005B downward),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the displacement of the specific image to the second position as the specific effect is the displacement of the first specific display area in the first direction and the second specific display area in the second direction opposite to the first direction. By executing this as a displacement in the direction, the performance effect of the specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A8 is the gaming machine described in form A6 or form A7,
The amount of displacement of the first specific display area and the amount of displacement of the second specific display area in the specific effect are different (for example, as shown in modification 006SG-3, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B as a pre-read preview effect) When the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions, the amount of movement (displacement) is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of a specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A6 to A8,
The effect image is arranged in a special display layer where the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-32, the cut effect image 006SG005S is (portions drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area as images with higher display priority than designs and background images),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the display position of a specific image changes as a specific effect, the display position of the effect image does not change, so the displacement of the display position of the specific image can be made more noticeable by comparing these specific images and the effect image. This allows the production effect of a specific production to be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A6 to A9,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
The effect execution means can display the effect image in a plurality of display modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-30, a portion where the crack effect image 006SG005H can be displayed in two colors, blue and red; As shown in Figure 16-33, the part where the cutting effect image 006SG005S can be displayed in three colors of blue, green, and red),
The rate at which the effect image is controlled to be in the advantageous state differs depending on which display mode the effect image is displayed in (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-30, in which color the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed) (as shown in FIG. 16-33, the part where the jackpot expectation differs depending on which color the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the effect image displayed during the specific performance, the performance effect of the specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A10,
The specific performance is a performance in which the specific image changes in stages (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-21, in the development suggestion performance of the characteristic part 006SG, it is displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R. As shown in Figure 16-27, in the revival performance of modified example 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside gradually expands and the corresponding As shown in Figure 16-35, where the amount of movement of the fragments that make up the decorative pattern gradually increases, the distortion of the decorative pattern and the background image gradually increases in the promotion performance of modification 006SG-5. going part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of the specific performance can be improved by changing the specific image in stages.

The gaming machine of form A12 is the gaming machine according to form A11,
The specific effect is a effect in which the display position of the specific image is gradually displaced from the first position to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-21, the development suggestion of the characteristic part 006SG In the presentation, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R gradually moves upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, As shown in FIG. 16-27, in the revival performance of Modified Example 006SG-2, the fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside gradually move from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the periphery of the display area. The part that moves, the part where the decorative design and background image are gradually distorted to the left in the promotion production of modification 006SG-5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to emphasize the displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific performance, so that the entertainment of the performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A13 is the gaming machine according to form A11,
The specific image is composed of a plurality of image pieces (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-28, a part in which a decorative pattern is composed of a plurality of pieces),
The specific effect is an effect in which the number of the displayed image pieces increases step by step (for example, as shown in modification 006SG-2, a plurality of fragments constituting a decorative pattern inside (the part that increases in stages according to the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visual effect of increasing the number of image pieces in stages can strongly impress the player with a specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A14 is the gaming machine described in form A11,
The specific effect is a effect in which the ratio of the area where the specific image is displayed to the display area increases in stages (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-28, the image display device 5 is (a portion where the proportion of the display area of the decorative design in the display area increases step by step),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the ratio of the area where the specific image is displayed to the display area increases in stages, thereby making it possible to more effectively draw the player's attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A11 to A14,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
The storage means is capable of storing a plurality of display position displacement information having different displacement modes of the specific image (for example, a portion in which a plurality of displacement image data are stored in the CGROM 206),
The rate at which the specific image is controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the display position displacement information is displaced (for example, in the variable display with the super reach variation pattern, the left area 006SG005L, While displacement image data is used to slide the images of the middle area 006SG005C and right area 006SG005R to the third stage, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area Since displacement image data is used for the image of 006SG005R to slide to the first stage or second stage, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the displacement mode of the specific image in the specific performance, it is possible to improve the performance interest of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A11 to A15,
The plurality of pieces of display position displacement information include first display position change information in which the specific image changes from a first aspect to a second aspect different from the first aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-21, super reach Displacement image data for sliding the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R to the third stage) and the specific image change from the first aspect to the first aspect. Second display position change information that does not change in two modes (for example, as shown in Figure 16-22, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R are the first stage) or displacement image data for sliding to the second stage),
The first display position change information and the second display position change information include a common changing section in which the image processing means changes the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-21 and FIG. 16-22, when using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, In the case of using displacement image data in which the image of the right area 006SG005R slides to the first stage, the parts in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common, When using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage. In the case of using displacement image data, the parts in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage are common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the process in which the specific image changes from the first mode to the second mode as the specific performance, so that the performance interest of the specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of form A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A16,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, a lower area 006SG005B),
The performance execution means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. (a portion where a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the area), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displacement specific image (for example, As shown in 16-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
After displaying the displacement specific image, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can be displaced (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-31(D) and 16-31(E)). After moving the upper region 006SG005T to the right and the lower region 006SG005B to the left, the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is further moved upward and downward, respectively),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the displacement specific image is displayed, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is further displaced, so that the production effect of the specific production can be enhanced, and the production is interesting. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form A18 is the gaming machine described in form A17,
The boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is different from at least one display area among the plurality of display areas including the first specific display area and the second specific display area. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 16-31(D) and 16-31(E), the upper region 006SG005T moves toward the right side, the lower region 006SG005B moves toward the left side, The boundary between area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B is a portion that moves in the vertical direction),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the production effect of the specific production can be further enhanced by the synergistic effect of the displacement of the plurality of display areas and the displacement of the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.

The gaming machine of form A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A18,
At least in the specific display layer, it is possible to arrange an image across an area corresponding to the display area and an area outside the area corresponding to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. At this time, the decorative pattern drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, and a part of the background image is moved outside the display area of the image display device 5. part to be placed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when displaying a displacement specific image in the display area as a specific effect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an inappropriate display will be performed in the display area.
In addition, in modification 006SG-5 of the present invention, when performing the promotion effect (specific effect), the displacement target image is enlarged so that the left and right width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5. Although form A is illustrated in which an image for promotion effect is created by applying a displacement image to the entire image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range to which the displacement image is applied in the displacement target image is , it is not necessary to displace only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

The gaming machine of form A20 is the gaming machine described in form A19,
The effect execution means is capable of enlarging an image displayed in the display area during a period in which the specific image is displaced from the first position to the second position as the specific effect (for example, according to progress of the promotion effect). (a part in which the decorative pattern drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged in stages),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display from being performed in the display area during the process up to displaying the displacement specific image while maintaining the production effect of the specific production.

The gaming machine of form A21 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A20,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, a lower area 006SG005B),
The effect execution means displays the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and displays the specific image in the first specific display area and the second specific display area as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose relative position with respect to the display area is displaced (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , the upper area 006SG005T is displayed moving toward the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is displayed moving toward the left side),
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are different (for example, As shown in modification example 006SG-3, the part where the image displayed by the hand in the upper area 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B are different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific performance can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, so it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A22 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A20,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, a lower area 006SG005B),
The effect execution means displays the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and displays the specific image in the first specific display area and the second specific display area as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose relative position with respect to the display area is displaced (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , the upper area 006SG005T is displayed moving toward the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is displayed moving toward the left side),
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, at least a portion of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are (For example, as shown in modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left) (at least a part of which is common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to add surprise to a specific performance, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form A23 is the gaming machine described in form A21 or form A22,
A part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the specific image is displayed is the first specific display when the displacement specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in modification 006SG-3, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the pre-read preview effect. A part of the image that is displayed across is not displayed as an image that is displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a pre-read preview effect. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further improve the performance interest of a specific performance.

The gaming machine of form A24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms A1 to A23,
The display means is capable of displaying a stereoscopic image composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-44, an autostereoscopic image display device 5' is a portion where a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of a right eye image (R image) and a left eye image (L image) can be displayed),
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect that displays the stereoscopic image (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-45(B), a portion where a preview effect during variable display can be displayed as a stereoscopic image),
When executing the specific effect, a non-stereoscopic image is displayed as the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-45(D), when executing the development suggestion effect, the development (The part where the image displayed as a suggestive effect is displayed as a two-dimensional image)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player's interest can be improved by the stereoscopic presentation, and since the displacement specific image is not displayed as the stereoscopic image in the specific presentation, the specific presentation can be carried out suitably.

The gaming machine of form A25 is the gaming machine described in form A24,
The right-eye image and the left-eye image are arranged in a stereoscopic display layer in which the arranged images are preferentially displayed in the display area than in the specific display layer.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when executing a specific effect, it is possible to suitably perform a stereoscopic effect.

The gaming machine of form A26 is the gaming machine described in form A24 or form A25,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the stereoscopic performance as an introductory performance of the specific performance in a period before the execution period of the specific performance during variable display.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by executing the stereoscopic presentation, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that the specific presentation will be executed, so that the presentation effect of the specific presentation can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 16-1, the performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, and the like. In the production control board 12, the production control CPU 120 operates according to a program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives production control commands via the input circuit 260. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 to perform display control of the image display device 5, such as generation of an image to be displayed on the image display device 5, based on the performance control command. Execute the process to

As shown in FIG. 16-1, the display control unit 123 controls the display of characters (also called image data such as people, animals, characters, figures, symbols, etc., CG data), decorative designs, and backgrounds as image element data used as sprite images. Image, a first reservation memory display area 006SG005D that specifiably displays the first special symbol reservation memory number as game-related information in the main feature section 006SG, and a second reservation memory that specifiably displays the second special symbol reservation memory number. Displayed together with a CGROM 205 in which data such as a first interface image 006SG005I for displaying a display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are stored, and an SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area. Configure the control circuit.

The performance control CPU 120 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to read necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which image data is stored in accordance with the received performance control command. The CGROM 205 stores in advance character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, image data of people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative designs), and background images. This is a ROM for storing. Note that the CGROM 205 in the feature section 006SG also stores a plurality of displacement image data for displacing the positions of pixels constituting the displacement target image to other positions by applying it to the displacement target image, which will be described later. There is. The display control unit 123 reads image data from the CGROM 205 in response to instructions from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 then executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 includes a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, attributes (parameters used when drawing characters, such as character drawing order, number of colors, scaling ratio, an attribute register 203 that stores data specifying palette numbers, coordinates, etc.; a drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of images to a drawing area in the VRAM area (described later); A data transfer control unit 211 that controls the transfer, video signals (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) for displaying image data stored in a display image creation area described later in the VRAM area. It is an integrated circuit equipped with a display control unit 213 that outputs a signal and a synchronization signal, a DA converter 214 that converts a video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal, and outputs the analog signal to the image display device 5.

A system bus and a CG bus are provided inside the display control unit 123, and the system bus and the CG bus are connected to the production control CPU 120 via a CPU interface 201, and an infrared camera 60 is connected. An image processing DSP 264 is connected. Furthermore, the CG bus is connected to the CGROM 205 via a CG bus interface 204. A system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and an attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, so that the production control CPU 120 can access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

Further, the drawing control unit 206, data transfer control unit 211, and display control unit 213 are connected to the system bus, and can access the system register 202. Further, the drawing control unit 206 and the data transfer control unit 211 are connected to the CG bus, and can access the CGROM 205 and the attribute register 203.

Further, a VRAM bus is further provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via a VRAM bus interface 209. A drawing control unit 206, a data transfer control unit 211, and a display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus, and the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

The system register 202 includes a system control register that stores instructions for initial settings, drawing, data transfer, etc., an interrupt control register that stores instructions for outputting interrupt signals (described later), a drawing area in the VRAM area, and arrangement of palette data. A drawing register that stores an area, a data transfer register that stores a source address, a destination address, etc. during data transfer, a display register that stores a display image creation area in the VRAM area, etc. are allocated.

The CPU interface 201 outputs a V blank interrupt signal to the production control CPU 120 every time a V blank (image update period) starts, and also outputs various other interrupt signals to the production control CPU 120. do.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this feature section 006SG, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, in one V blank, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. During this time, drawing will continue to be performed in the other area.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 16-2(a) and 16-2(b), in this feature section 006SG, an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created by superimposing (synthesizing) a plurality of layers. is being generated. The VRAM area includes a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each layer, and images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (synthesized) and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area for generating an image to be displayed is arranged (see FIG. 16-5). Note that each layer has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower layers, and images in higher layers are set to have higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers have higher display priority on the image display device 5. is set low.

As shown in Figures 16-5 (A) and 16-5 (B), the VRAM area has a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 1 images, and a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 2 images. A layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the layer 3 image, and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the layer 3 image are arranged. Further, a displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image, which will be described later, and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

The displacement image creation area creates an image by superimposing (synthesizing) the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area as a displacement target image, This is an area in which a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to be described later to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area superimposes images drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and images drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area ( A display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area. This is the area to be created as an image for use.

Note that the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) in the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image display An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are the highest in the image display device 5. Each is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low).

In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is the middle layer with lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority. It's a layer.

As shown in FIG. 16-2(b) and FIG. 16-5(B), the layer 1 image drawing area displays the number of stored first special figures in a manner that allows identification at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first interface image 006SG005I, which includes a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D for displaying the data and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U for specifyably displaying the number of reserved special figures, and in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, This is a drawing area where these images are drawn in order to display the second interface image 006SG005J that includes small patterns whose display area is smaller than the decorative patterns.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 in order to perform variable display of decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a background image is drawn in order to display the background image in the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this feature section 006SG, images drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), images drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and layer 3 image drawing area An image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing each of the images drawn and arranged in (layer 3 images). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) are set to have the highest display priority, and therefore are the most The image (decoration pattern) that is displayed as an upper layer image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, so the image display device 5 The image (background image) that is displayed as a middle-layer image and drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to have the lowest display priority, and is therefore displayed as a low-layer image on the image display device 5.

In addition, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area in this feature section 006SG have a transparency of 0% so that when superimposed, the upper layer image makes the overlapping area of the lower layer image invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the image drawn and arranged in each image drawing area is set higher than 0%, and the image display device 5 An image that is transparently displayed in the display area or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

Next, a method for displacing the displacement target image in the feature section 006SG will be explained. As shown in FIG. 16-3(A), a plurality of pixels having a red component value (R value) and a green component value (G value) are arranged in the displacement image applied to the displacement target image. These R value and G value each take a value in the range of 1 to 256.

Taking one pixel A among these plurality of pixels as an example, the display control unit 123 moves the image into the displacement target image from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image according to the R value and G value of the pixel A. The position of the pixel X to be displaced is specified from . Specifically, if the R value of pixel A is 1 to 127, the display control unit 123 displays the position moved in the negative direction (left direction) of the X axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image. is specified as the coordinate (position) of pixel X in the X-axis direction, and if the R value of pixel A is 129 to 256, move in the positive direction (rightward) of the The position of the pixel X is specified as the coordinate of the pixel X in the X-axis direction. Note that the amount of movement in the X-axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is the difference from 128, which is the median R value.

In addition, if the G value of pixel A is 1 to 127, the coordinate of pixel If the G value of pixel A is 129 to 256, the position moved in the positive direction (upward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is set in the Y axis direction of pixel X. Specify as the coordinates (position) of Note that the amount of movement in the Y-axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is the difference from 128, which is the median value of the G values.

After specifying the position of pixel X in the displacement target image, pixel X is designated as a pixel to be displayed at a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image. That is, pixel X is displaced to a position corresponding to pixel A. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, by individually adjusting the R value and G value of pixel A, it is possible to displace any pixel X to a position corresponding to pixel A, and also By adjusting the values to be the same, it is also possible to displace a specific pixel X, which is the same amount away from the position corresponding to pixel A, to the position corresponding to pixel A.

The display control unit 123 executes the above process for a plurality of pixels. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-3(B), the displacement image is divided into multiple regions with different R values and G values (displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, displacement image The displacement image is generated by applying each region to the displacement target image.

For example, as shown in Figures 16-4(A) to 16-4(C), the R value is 128 and the G value is any one of 1 to 127 as a region composing the displacement image. A certain displacement image a has an R value of 128 and a G value of 1 between 129 and 256. A displacement image b has an R value of 1 between 1 and 127 and a G value of 128. A certain displacement image c and a displacement image d having an R value of 1 from 129 to 256 and a G value of 128 are provided, and a triple circle image is set as a displacement target image.

In this case, as shown in Figure 16-4 (D), for the displacement image a, in the displacement target image, the range moved downward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image a is converted into a displacement image. Specify the display range. In addition, as shown in Figure 16-4 (E), regarding the displacement image b, in the displacement target image, the range moved upward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image b is displayed in the displacement image. Specify a range. In addition, as shown in Figure 16-4 (F), regarding the displacement image c, in the displacement image, the range moved to the left by the difference in R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image c is Specify the display range. In addition, as shown in Figure 16-4 (G), regarding the displacement image d, in the displacement image, the position moved to the right by the difference in R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image d is Specify the display range.

As described above, the range specified from the displacement target image by the R value and G value of displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, and displacement image d is defined as displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image By displacing the image c and the displacement image d, a displacement image as shown in FIG. 16-4(H) is generated.

In addition, in this feature part 006SG, by setting either the R value or the G value of the displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, and displacement image d to a fixed value, these displacement images a, Although the boundaries of displacement image b, displacement image c, and displacement image d are clearly demarcated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, these displacement image a, displacement image b, and displacement image It is also possible to generate a gradation-like image as a displacement image by gradually varying the R value and G value of pixels near each boundary of the image c and the displacement image d.

FIG. 16-6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 006SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 16-6(A) is just an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 16-6(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 16-6 (B), determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot" (predetermined result). ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 16-6(B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 16-6(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 16-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 16-7, in this feature section 006SG, on the main board 11 side, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 16-8 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 006SG, a common special figure display result judgment table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result and a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table that will be used.

In the special figure display result determination table in this characteristic section 006SG, the special figure display results are determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used to determine whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this feature section 006SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 006SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 006SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state.

FIG. 16-9(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 006SG selects one of a plurality of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 006SG using FIG. 16-9(B), in this feature section 006SG, as jackpot types, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state changes from the normal state. This is a so-called consecutive winning situation, which occurs continuously without any intervention.

On the other hand, the time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 006SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 16-9(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 16-9 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 16-10 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 006SG. In this characteristic part 006SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, although this characteristic part 006SG provides one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this feature part 006SG, two types of variation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach variation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two types of super reach variation patterns are provided. More than one type or only one type may be provided.

In addition, the super reach variation pattern in this feature section 006SG is a variation pattern of super reach α, a variation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-2), a variation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PA2-2), and a variation pattern of super reach β. As the fluctuation patterns, there are provided a fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a jackpot and a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 16-10, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 006SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature part 006SG, the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In particular, the special figure variation time of the super reach β variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach α variation pattern. In other words, the super reach β variation pattern is set so that the expectation level of a jackpot where the variable display result is a “jackpot” is higher than the super reach α variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Note that the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) in this feature section 006 are displayed during variable display. It is also a variation pattern that executes a performance that suggests the development of a super reach performance after a reach is established. In the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1), the variable display result is displayed without developing into the super reach reach effect after the development suggestion effect is executed, while the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2 , PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), the reach effect of super reach is executed after the execution of the development suggestion effect.

In addition, in this feature part 006SG, the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) are displayed during variable display. , exemplifies a form in which a development suggestion performance to a super reach reach performance is executed after a reach is established, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern are different from each other. A variation pattern may be provided in which the development suggestion effect is not executed. Note that when the development suggestion performance is executed, the rate of development to the super reach reach performance may be set higher than when the development suggestion performance is not executed.

FIG. 16-11 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 006SG. In this feature section 006SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 16-11, if the variable display result is a jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table. (Normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (Super reach α jackpot variation pattern), and PB1-3 (Super reach β jackpot variation pattern).

Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 35%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. The present invention is not limited to the above, but includes a plurality of jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables with different determination ratios among PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3, and different jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables depending on the jackpot type. may be used to determine the variation pattern. By doing this, it is possible to create a variable pattern that is easily determined for each type of jackpot, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to which variable display of the variable pattern the variable display result is a jackpot, You can improve your interest in gaming.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α variation pattern), PA2 Determine from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table B, change the variation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α out), PA2 Determine from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out), PA2-2 (variation pattern with out of super reach α), PA2 Determine from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. Determined from (Variation pattern for shortening time saving when non-reach is off), PA2-1 (Variation pattern when normal reach is off), PA2-2 (Variation pattern when super reach α is off), and PA2-3 (Variation pattern when super reach β is off) do.

Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table D, PA1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 006SG is "off", the special figure is Since the rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 006SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a regular figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It includes a setting section and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the holding number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). Based on this, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc. as pending data. , are stored until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the holding number, and the second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). Based on this, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc. as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The standard figure holding storage section stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure reservation storage unit associates the game balls with the hold numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and is used for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 of is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting section, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and are periodically counted according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 16-1 is provided with, for example, a performance control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area shown in FIG. 16-15(A) includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The effect control flag setting section includes a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values for each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 006SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section. The reception command buffer at the time of starting a winning is a storage area (corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") of the first special figure reserved memory. A storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed is provided. In addition, the start winning command buffer has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special figure reserved memory. (an area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") and a storage area (an area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning prize designation command (first starting opening winning prize designation command or second starting opening winning prize designation command) and a pending storage number notification command ( The first pending memory number notification command or the second pending memory number notification command) are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning are associated with these starting opening winning designation command and pending memory number notification command, Storage areas (entries) are secured for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

FIG. 16-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 16-12, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141;N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 006 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 006SGS144), the process moves to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the game control counter setting section reads out the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 006SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation memory number is other than "0" at step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 006 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the first special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 006SGS148), the process moves to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the special symbol display result judgment shown in FIG. Select and set the table. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006 SGS150a). In addition, in this step 006SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is in the ON state, the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is in a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off and the probability is low, if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not, it will be judged as a "miss". judge.

In this way, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high accuracy, low accuracy). , In the process of step 006 SGS150a, the special figure display result is determined using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether the gaming state when variable display of the special figure game etc. is started is a high certainty state or not. By determining whether or not to be considered a "jackpot", when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16-9(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type is determined to be one of the plurality of types depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type of ``A'', ``Probable variable jackpot B'', and ``Probable variable jackpot C'' matches (Step 006 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006 SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Whether to control or not is determined before the fixed special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 006SGS155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "1", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

After step 006SGS155 ends, or if it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is not a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; N), it is determined whether to control the jackpot gaming state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on or not). A fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of (2) and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 006SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of reserved memories of the special pattern game using the first special pattern is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 006SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

FIG. 16-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 16-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161; Y), a jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 006SGS164).

In the determination at step 006SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 006SGS161; N), the gaming state is changed by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section. It is determined whether or not time saving control is being performed in which time saving control is performed in the state or time saving state (step 006 SGS168). If the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS168; Y), the failure variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns ( Step 006SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not turned on (step 006SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the pending storage number counter for variable special symbols provided in the game control counter setting section By reading, etc., the number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is specified, and it is determined whether the number of pending memories of the identified variable special symbols is 1 or 2 (step 006 SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), the variation pattern determination table A for failure is used as a table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variation patterns. Select and set (step 006SGS171).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 006SGS172). ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 3 (step 006SGS172; Y), select the variation pattern determination table B for failure as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern as one of multiple types. (Step 006SGS173).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is not 3, that is, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is 4 (step 006SGS172; N), select one of the multiple types of variable patterns. As the table to be used for determining the deviation pattern, the error variation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 006SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS175.

After executing any of the processes in step 006SGS164, step 006SGS169, step 006SGS171, step 006SGS173, and step 006SGS174, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer etc. Based on the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special hit fluctuation pattern determination table, or loss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D, one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns can be selected. (Step 006SGS175).

Incidentally, when the jackpot flag is off, by determining the fluctuation pattern in the process of step 006SGS175, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 006SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol should be set to the reach state when the variable display result is "miss".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 006SGS175, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 006 SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 006SGS176, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol (step 006SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting section sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the send command buffer. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting section. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 006SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern is set (step 006SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. It's time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 006SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS177, each time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. The designation command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command are sent in sequence. It turns out. The order in which these production control commands are sent can be changed arbitrarily, for example, the variable display result specification command is sent first, and then the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, and the variable pattern are sent. The designation command, the game state designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 16-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S112 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 006SGS180). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y) and the probability change flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and time saving flag and turns them off (step 006SGS184). , hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), win start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), win start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), depending on the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. Settings are made to transmit the winning start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) (step 006 SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 006SGS187). Also, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or a variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. (Step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 006SGS189), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0" or not. If the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS190; Y), the process advances to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 006 SGS190; N), that is, if the number of time saving times remains and the high base state is reached, the value of the time saving number counter is -1 (step 006SGS190;N). 006SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 006SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 006SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (Step 006SGS193; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 006SGS194), and then the time-saving flag corresponding to the state of the variable probability flag or the time-saving flag is cleared. After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (specifically, the low probability/low base state) (step 006SGS195), the process advances to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

FIG. 16-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. is set (step 006 SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006 SGS204). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probable variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the probability variable flag is turned on (step 006SGS207), the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS208), and the time saving number counter is set to "0". After setting (step 006SGS209), the process advances to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), step 006SGS211 and step 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set "100" to the time-saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command to notify the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 006 SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is specially set. It is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 006 SGS216).

Next, the operation of the production control CPU 120 will be explained. FIG. 16-16 is a part of the flowchart of the production control process shown in FIG. In the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 performs a background image change process (step 006SG162) for changing the background image displayed on the image display device 5 after executing the prefetch notice setting process (step S161) described above. ), and any one of steps S170 to S175 is executed.

As the background image change process, for example, the performance control CPU 120 changes the image display at the start timing of variable display (timing when the performance control process process is executed with the value of the performance control process flag set to 1). It is sufficient to decide to change the background image displayed on the device 5 at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%), and start displaying a new background image on the image display device 5 in accordance with the determination. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, when any one of a plurality of background images is displayed on the image display device 5, a variable display of the decorative pattern and an effect corresponding to the variable display are executed. There is.

In addition, in the background image change process, the production control CPU 120 changes when the gaming state changes (for example, from the normal state to the jackpot gaming state, from the jackpot gaming state to the probability change state or time saving state, from the probability change state or time saving state to the jackpot state or normal When the state changes), the image display device 5 may be able to display a background image corresponding to the game state to which the change is made.

FIG. 16-17 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the variable display effect processing of the effect control process processing. In the variable display production process, the production control CPU 120 uses a process timer according to the process table selected by the production control CPU 120 in accordance with the variation pattern in the variable display start setting process; Each value of the set variable display time timer and variable display control timer is decreased by 1 (step 006SGS901, step 006SGS902, step 006SGS903).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the process timer has timed out (step 006SGS906). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 006SGS907). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 006SGS908). In addition, the control state for the presentation device (performance component) is changed based on the contents of the next set process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation part control data, etc.) (Step 006SGS909). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the production device (for production control of the parts) is executed (step 006SGS910).

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921; Y), the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to display the next display screen of the decorative pattern at the center left (display switching of the previous decorative pattern). Image data for the screen to be displayed after 30 ms has elapsed from the point in time is created (step 006SGS922). In addition, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display is a variable display of a normal reach or super reach variation pattern (step 066SGS923).

If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern (step 066SGS923; N), proceed to step 006SGS927; if the variable display is a normal reach or super reach variable display (step 006SGS923; Y), proceed to step 006SGS927. Furthermore, it is determined whether a display image processing flag, which will be described later, is on (step 006SGS924).

If the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS924; Y), proceed to step 006SGS926; if the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS924; N), check the contents of the process data being executed. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to start suggesting the development of Super Reach to reach effect (Step 006SGS925). If it is not the timing to start suggesting the development of Super Reach to the reach effect (Step 006SGS925; N), proceed to Step 006SGS927, and if it is the timing to start suggesting the development of Super Reach to the reach effect (Step 006SGS925; Y), proceed to Step 006SGS926. move on.

As step 006SGS926, the performance control CPU 120 executes a display image processing process for processing (displacing) a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and proceeds to step 006SGS927.

In step 006SGS927, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to execute a process of compositing (superimposing) the images created in the above-described steps 006SGS922 and 006SGS921 on the display image creation area of the VRAM 209. Then, the variable display control timer is reset (step 006SGS928). In this way, variable display control of decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs to the image display device 5 a signal based on an image obtained by superimposing an image such as a set background image and an image based on display control execution data set in the process table. In this manner, the background image, character image, decorative pattern, etc. in the variation of the decorative pattern are displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 16-19, the image displayed within the display area of the image display device 5 in this feature section 006SG includes a part of the background image and a position that has been pre-positioned so that it will be displayed within the display area. are the adjusted first interface image 006SG005I, second interface image 006SG005J, and decorative pattern. In particular, the background image in this feature section 006SG is drawn as an image that is longer in the horizontal and vertical width directions than the display area of the image display device 5, and the background image in the display area of the image display device 5 is The center portion of the image in the left and right width direction is displayed. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, at least the layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the background image, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area are larger in vertical width and horizontal width than the display area of the image display device 5. This is an area for drawing and arranging a long image, and the display area of the image display device 5 displays only a portion of the image that corresponds to the display area.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, an image whose vertical width dimension and horizontal width dimension are longer than the display area of the image display device 5 is drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area, displacement image creation area, and display image creation area. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the layer 3 image drawing area and the displacement image creation area are set to have a vertical width smaller than the display area of the image display device 5. While the display image creation area is used as an area for drawing and arranging images with long dimensions and horizontal width dimensions, the display image creation area is an image whose vertical width dimensions and left and right width dimensions are the same as the display area of the image display device 5. It may also be an image that is drawn and placed. In this case, out of the image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area or the displacement image creation area, only the part corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5 is placed in the display image creation area. The background image may be displayed in the display area of the display device 5.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 006SGS929). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is on (step 006 SGS930; Y), the value of the production control process flag is changed to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, once a pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control will stop the fluctuation, so for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even in such a case, when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol), the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended.

FIG. 16-18 is a flowchart showing display image processing processing (step 006SGS926) during the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 16-17. In the display image processing process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS941). If the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS941; N), it is determined whether the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the super reach variation pattern (step 006SGS942). If the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach (step 006SGS942; Y), image data for displacement for successful development to super reach performance (for notification of execution of super reach performance) is selected. The process then proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS943).

Note that the image data for displacement in this feature section 006SG includes the displacement target image (in the case of this feature section 006SG, an image obtained by superimposing an image placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image placed in the layer 3 image drawing area). This is data in which displacement images to be applied to (images placed in the displacement image creation area) are arranged in chronological order.

In addition, when the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the normal reach variation pattern (step 006SGS942; N), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 for failure to develop to the super reach performance (for notification of non-execution of the super reach performance). It is determined at a predetermined ratio which one of the displacement image data for super reach performance development failure A and the displacement image data for super reach performance development failure B to be selected as the displacement image data (step 006SGS944). For example, the selection of displacement image data for super reach effect development failure A may be determined at a rate of 50%, and the selection of displacement image data for super reach effect development failure B may be determined at a rate of 50%.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, two displacement image data, A for failure to develop super reach performance and displacement image data for B for failure to develop super reach performance, are used as displacement image data for failure to develop to super reach performance. Although a form in which displacement image data can be selected is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are three types of displacement image data that can be selected as displacement image data for failure to develop to super reach performance. There may be more than one.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the displacement image data for super reach performance development failure A has been determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945). If it is determined in step 006SGS944 that the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure A has been selected (step 006SGS945; Y), the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure A is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948. (Step 006SGS946), if it has been decided to select the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure B (step 006SGS945; N), select the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure B and step 006SGS948 (Step 006SGS947).

In step 006SGS948, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the display image processing flag. Then, the first displacement image is selected from the selected displacement image data (step 006SGS949), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS951.

Further, if the display image processing flag is on in step 006SGS941 (step 006SGS941; Y), the effect control CPU 120 selects the next displacement image from the selected displacement image data and proceeds to step 006SGS951 (step 006SGS941; Y). 006SGS950).

In step 006SGS951, the effect control CPU 120 executes displacement image drawing processing. In the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120, for example, draws an image placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image placed in the layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 16-5 in the displacement image creation area. A process of creating a displacement image by combining (superimposing) to create a displacement target image and applying the displacement image selected in step 006SGS949 or step 006SGS950 to the image may be executed.

After executing the displacement image drawing process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952). Whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image is determined by, for example, whether the displacement image selected in step 006SGS950 is the last displacement image in the displacement image data. do it.

If the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; Y), the display image processing flag is turned off to end the display image processing process (step 006SGS953), and the displacement image drawing process ends. If the displacement image created in is not the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; N), the display image processing process is ended without going through step 006SGS953.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in variable display of decorative patterns in the feature section 006SG will be explained based on FIGS. 16-20 to 16-23. First, as shown in FIGS. 16-20(A) and 16-20(B), in this feature section 006SG, the display mode of the decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the gaming state. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-20 (A), when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), a character image and a numerical image are combined as decorative symbols for the normal state. A decorative pattern is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 16-20(B), when the gaming state is a time-saving state (low probability low base state or high probability high base state), a time-saving state decoration with only a number image is used as a decorative pattern. The pattern will be displayed.

Then, in the variable display with the super reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 16-21 (A) and 16-21 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging depending on the combination of reach. After that, the inner decorative pattern with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. As shown in FIG. 16-21(C), the development suggestion effect is such that the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the left area 006SG005L that includes the left decorative pattern. , a middle area 006SG005C including the inner decorative pattern, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative pattern. Then, as shown in Figures 16-21(C) to 16-21(E), the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image included in the middle area 006SG005C) is gradually changed. A development notification pattern that notifies you of the development of a super reach reach effect from above by sliding downward (indicated as "Development!" as shown in Figures 16-21 (C) to 16-21 (E)) 2) is moved and displayed toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

Incidentally, the development notification symbol in the feature section 006SG is a symbol that is displayed only when the development suggestion performance is executed, and is not displayed during the execution period of other performances during variable display.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R ( The decorative pattern and background image on the right slide upward.

The amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in Figure 16-21 (C) and the second step shown in Figure 16-21 (D). The number increases as the number of stages progresses through the third stage shown in Figure 16-21(E).

When the third stage of sliding movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is completed, the image is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 (the center of the middle area 006SG005C). The movement of the development notification symbol is completed and the development of super reach to reach effect is announced.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 16-22 (A) and 16-22 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging depending on the combination of reach. After that, the inner decorative pattern with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. As shown in FIG. 16-22(C), the development suggestion effect is such that the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the left area 006SG005L that includes the left decorative pattern. , a middle area 006SG005C including the inner decorative pattern, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative pattern. Then, as shown in Figures 16-22(C) to 16-22(E), the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image included in the middle area 006SG005C) is gradually changed. By sliding downward, a development notification pattern is displayed moving toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to notify that the super reach performance will develop from above.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R ( The decorative pattern and background image on the right slide upward.

The amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in Figure 16-22 (C) and the second step shown in Figure 16-22 (D). It will increase as you progress through the stages.

However, in the normal reach variable display, after the first slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is executed, or the second step slide movement is After the execution, as shown in FIG. 16-22(E), the development suggestion effect ends without the third stage of slide movement being executed, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes to the image shown in FIG. The state returns to the state shown in -22(B), and the decorative pattern and small pattern stop at a combination indicating a miss.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 16-21(C) to 16-21(E), in this feature section 006SG, the amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R exemplifies a form in which the number increases as the stage progresses; however, the present invention is not limited to this. The amount of movement may decrease as the stages progress, or the amount of movement may increase or decrease only in any of the first to third stages.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, as an example of a development suggestion effect, each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is exemplified as being able to be moved and displayed up to three levels. However, the number of steps in which each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is slid as a development suggestion effect may be two or less or four or more.

In addition, as shown in Figures 16-21(C) to 16-21(E), in this feature section 006SG, the sliding direction of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R is displayed in the middle area 006SG005C. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the sliding direction of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R is the middle area 006SG005C. It may be in the same direction as the image displayed on the screen.

Further, in the present feature section 006SG, an example is given in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced regarding the development suggestion performance when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), but the present invention The image displayed on the image display device 5 may also be displaced for the development suggestion performance when the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state). .

In addition, as a development suggestion effect in this feature section 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-23 (A) to 16-23 (E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first reserved storage display area. A first interface image 006SG005I including 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and a decorative pattern including the development notification pattern described above is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the 3-image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is A displacement image is created by applying the displacement image to the image.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area are superimposed to display a display on the image display device 5. The image is now created.

In other words, as shown in FIGS. 16-21 and 16-22, the first interface image 006SG005I and The second interface image 006SG005J is an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and therefore is not subject to displacement. For this reason, the visibility from the player is reduced by moving the decorative pattern upward or downward in the display area of the image display device 5 as a development suggestion effect, while the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the display of the second interface image 006SG005J at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 is maintained at the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, the visibility of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J is reduced. There isn't.

In addition, as shown in Figures 16-21 and 16-22, in the variable display using the super reach variation pattern, the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage. On the other hand, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, the displacement image data for the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is used to slide to the first or second stage. Image data is used. Here, as mentioned above, the variable display in the super reach variation pattern is set to have a higher proportion of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state than the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, so in this feature section 006SG, the development The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled differs depending on the displacement image data used in the suggestion performance.

In addition, in the development suggestion production of this feature section 006SG, the left area 006SG005L contains the left decorative pattern, the middle area 006SG005C contains the middle decorative pattern, and the right area 006SG005R contains the right decorative pattern, and these left, middle, and right The decorative patterns, including characters and numbers, slide and move without being separated, so it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest of the development suggestion performance due to the separation of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns. ing.

Note that in this feature section 006SG, an example is shown in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R are moved upward or downward, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this. , only one or two of the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R may be moved upward or downward.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature section 006SG, image data for displaying decorative patterns and background images, and displacement image data for displacing the display positions of these decorative patterns and background images. Specific effects that change the display position of these decorative patterns and background images just by using them (development suggestion effect in characteristic part 006SG, reach suggestion effect in modification example 006SG-1, revival effect in modification example 006SG-2, modification example 006SG- 3, promotion performance in modification 006SG-5, temporary stop suggestion performance and temporary stop notification performance in modification 006SG-6), these specific performances can be executed using dedicated data. The amount of data stored in the CGROM 205 can be reduced compared to the case where the data is stored in the CGROM 205.

In particular, in this feature section 006SG, since it is possible to display a plurality of images as background images on the image display device 5, originally it would be possible to produce a specific effect depending on whether each background image is displayed or the variable display mode. The pattern must be stored in the CGROM 205 in advance, but in this feature section 006SG, the image displayed on the image display device 5 can be instantly displaced by simply using the displacement image data, so the pattern is stored in the CGROM 205. The amount of data can be reduced. In addition, in this feature section 006SG, as game related information, a first reservation storage display area 006SG005D that can specify the number of first reserved special symbols stored and a second reservation storage display area 006SG005U that can specify the number of second reserved special symbols stored. , and small symbols whose display area is smaller than decorative symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game-related information includes information such as information indicating that the game state is time-saving. A fourth element that can identify that a firing promotion display or a variable display that prompts the player to launch (launch) the game ball toward the big prize opening or the gate 41 is being executed based on the state or probability change state. A pattern or the like may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 16-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority. Since this is a non-target image for image displacement in the development suggestion performance, the display position will not shift with the image of the left area 006SG005L, the image of the right area 006SG005R, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C, which are the displacement targets, and the development suggestion. It is possible to prevent game-related information such as the number of stored special symbols and the variable display of small symbols from becoming difficult for players to visually recognize when performing performances.

Further, among the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlappingly with the image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion performance. Since the display position of the second interface image 006SG005J itself does not change, the player can recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the second interface image 006SG005J without any discomfort. On the other hand, since the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R during the development suggestion performance, the player can A first method that accurately displays the number of stored first special symbols in the first interface image 006SG005I in a specifiable manner without being affected by the displacement (slide movement) of each image of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R. It is possible to recognize the pending memory display area 006SG005D and the second pending memory display area 006SG005U that specifiably displays the number of second special symbol pending memories.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 16-21 and 16-23, the decorative pattern is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern is placed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. By moving upward or downward from the section, the visibility is reduced, which improves the performance effect of the development suggestion performance. Furthermore, the small designs are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion performance is executed, unlike decorative designs, they do not move from the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, so visibility does not decrease. The player can easily understand the progress of the game by visually recognizing the small symbols even during execution of the development suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 16-21, the development suggestion effect of this feature section 006SG is such that the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R increases in stages. , while improving the performance effect of the development suggestion performance, it is possible to emphasize the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R at each stage, further improving the performance effect. can.

In addition, as shown in Figures 16-21 and 16-22, in the variable display with the super reach variation pattern, the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage. While displacement image data is used, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, the displacement image is used to slide the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R to the first or second stage. data is used, and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion production. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of moving stages of the image, and it is possible to improve the performance interest of the development suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in Figures 16-21 and 16-22, when using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the left area 006SG005L, the middle area When using displacement image data in which the images of area 006SG005C and right area 006SG005R slide to the first step, the parts where the images of left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the first step are common. When using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R move to the second stage. In the case of using displacement image data that slides, the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R have the same part that slides to the second stage, so the left area 006SG005L is used as a development suggestion effect. , the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R can draw the player's attention to the process such as the number of steps in which the images slide, so that the entertainment of the development suggestion performance can be further improved.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, in the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 16-24 and 16-25 as modified example 006SG-1, it is suggested that the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 is a reach during variable display. It may also be possible to perform a reach suggestion effect.

The production mode of the reach suggestion production will be explained based on FIGS. 16-24 and 16-25. First, in a variable display with a normal reach or super reach variation pattern, as shown in Figures 16-24(A) to 16-24(C), the left ornament is displayed at the timing immediately before the left ornament stops. An effect image such as a character acts on the pattern, and the left decorative pattern stops. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the left decorative pattern is displayed in a distorted manner.

Next, as shown in Figures 16-24(D) to 16-24(F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative symbol at the timing immediately before the right decorative symbol stops, and the right decorative symbol The decorative pattern stops and becomes a reach. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the right decorative pattern is displayed in a distorted manner.

On the other hand, in a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern, as shown in Figures 16-25(A) to 16-25(C), the left decorative symbol is displayed at the timing immediately before the left decorative symbol stops. An effect image such as a character acts on the image, and the left decorative pattern stops. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the left decorative pattern is displayed in a distorted manner.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 16-25(D) to 16-25(F), an effect image such as a character acts on the right decorative pattern at the timing immediately before the right decorative pattern stops. A number of symbols that do not match the reach combination stop as decorative symbols. At this time, the decorative pattern on the right stops and becomes a reach. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the right decorative pattern is displayed without distortion.

In addition, as for the reach suggestion effect in this modified example 006SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 16-26(A) to 16-26(F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area is A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, an action image is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image drawing area is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn on. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-1, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is A displacement image is created by applying the displacement image to the image.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, a form in which reach suggestion performance can be executed in variable display of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reach suggestion performance may not be executed in part of the variable display of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, a form in which action images such as characters act on the left and right decorative patterns is exemplified as a reach suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. As the reach suggestion performance in the variable display of the reach variation pattern, a case may be provided in which the effect image acts on the decorative pattern only once (acts only on the left decorative pattern).

Furthermore, in this modification example 006SG-1, a form in which an action image such as a character acts on a decorative pattern as a reach suggestion effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple reach suggestion effects may be used. The effect image may be displayed, and the proportion of the reach may be changed depending on which effect image acts on the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-1, in the case where a reach is not achieved even though an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the effect image or the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern Although a form in which a part of the image is not distorted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the effect image must be used regardless of whether or not it becomes a reach. A part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern on which the effect is applied may be distorted.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, when an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, a part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern on which the effect image acts is distorted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the display area overlaps with the decorative pattern on which the effect image acts. Only one of the parts of the background image may be distorted.

Further, in the feature section 213SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 16-27 and 16-28 as modification 006SG-2, the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 is to use a decorative pattern that is once stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination. It may also be possible to perform a revival performance in which the characters change into a jackpot combination.

The performance mode of the revival performance will be explained based on FIGS. 16-27 and 16-28. First, in the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in Figure 16-27 (A), after the variable display result is suggested as a hit as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, the decorative symbol is a hit. Wrong combinations are displayed oscillatingly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-27(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlappingly on the inner decoration pattern, and a plurality of inner decoration patterns are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. appears divided into pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-27(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are displayed in an enlarged manner from the state shown in FIG. 16-27(B) as the second stage crack, and each fragment is displayed as an image. They move in different directions from the center of the device 5 so as to spread out.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 16-27(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed as the third stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 16-27(C), and each fragment is further enlarged. Move to spread.

Then, as a crack in the fourth stage, an image of fragments of the decorative pattern inside scattering is finally displayed, and then a new decorative pattern is displayed as the decorative pattern inside, indicating that it is a jackpot. Variable display stops.

On the other hand, in the case where the variable display result is a loss, as shown in Figure 16-28 (A), after the variable display result is suggested to be a loss as a reach effect for normal reach or super reach, the decorative pattern is displayed. The reach is displayed oscillatingly depending on the combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16-28(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlappingly on the inner decoration pattern, and a plurality of inner decoration patterns are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. appears divided into pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-28(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are displayed in an enlarged manner from the state shown in FIG. 16-28(B) as the second stage crack, and each fragment is displayed as an image. They move in different directions from the center of the device 5 so as to spread out.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 16-28(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged and displayed as the third stage crack from the state shown in FIG. 16-28(C), and each fragment is further enlarged. Move to spread.

However, in a variable display in which the variable display result is incorrect, after the first stage cracking is performed, after the second stage cracking is performed, or after the third stage cracking is performed, The revival effect ends without the fourth stage of cracking being executed, the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in FIG. 16-28(A), and the decorative pattern and small pattern are removed. Stop at the combination shown.

In addition, as a revival effect in this modified example 006SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 16-29(A) to 16-29(F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has the first reserved memory display. A first interface image 006SG005I including area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, a crack effect image 006SG005H is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-2, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created using the image drawn in the layer 3 image rendering area, and a displacement image (middle image) is created by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image. An image in which the decorative pattern is divided into multiple pieces and each piece is displayed as if it were spread out is created.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the layer 4 A display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

In particular, in this modification 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside expands step by step as a revival effect. In other words, in the resurrection effect, the proportion of the display area of the decorative pattern inside the display area of the image display device 5 Since the number increases in stages, it is possible to more effectively draw the attention of the player to the revival performance by expanding the decorative symbols therein in stages.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, a mode is illustrated in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlappingly on the decorative pattern inside as a revival effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack effect image A plurality of display modes of 006SG005H may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot may be varied depending on which display mode the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed.

For example, as shown in Figure 16-30, blue and red are provided as the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H, and when the variable display result is a jackpot, the blue crack is displayed at a rate of 20% when the revival effect is executed. The effect image 006SG005H is displayed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the revival performance is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H will be displayed when the revival effect is executed at a rate of 80%, and the red crack effect will be displayed when the resurrection effect is executed at a 20% rate. The image 006SG005H may be displayed.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, two colors, red and blue, are provided as the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H are Three or more colors may be provided.

In addition, in the present modification 006SG-2, a mode is exemplified in which a revival effect is executed when the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the revival performance may be executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, as shown in FIG. 16-28, the decorative pattern inside is composed of a plurality of fragments in the resurrection performance, and the number of these fragments is maintained as the resurrection performance progresses. , an example is given in which the fragments are moved in stages from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the periphery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns in these The plurality of constituent fragments may be increased in stages as the revival performance progresses. By doing this, the resurrection performance can strongly impress the player with the visual effect that the number of fragments forming the inner decoration pattern increases as the resurrection performance progresses.

Furthermore, in the feature section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIG. 16-31 as modification 006SG-3, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a variable display is executed in a super reach variation pattern in the reserved memory. A look-ahead preview performance may be performed that suggests from a plurality of previous variable displays that a variable display in which the variable display result is a jackpot will be executed.

The appearance of the look-ahead preview effect will be explained based on FIG. 16-31. First, in a state where a plurality of pending memories exist, as shown in FIGS. 16-31(A) and 16-31(B), the variable display being executed stops when a combination of decorative symbols is out of order. Next, as shown in FIGS. 16-31 (C) and 16-31 (D), when the next variable display is started, a cutting effect that crosses the display area left and right in the display area of the image display device 5 is created. Image 006SG005S is displayed overlappingly with the decorative pattern and background image. Among the display areas displayed on the image display device 5, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is divided into a lower lower area 006SG005B including the decorative pattern and a part of the background image, and the remaining area with the cutting effect image 006SG005S as the border. It is divided into an upper region 006SG005T containing a decorative pattern and a background image. In other words, the boundary between the lower region 006SG005B and the upper upper region 006SG005T is hidden from the player by the cutting effect image 006SG005S.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 16-31(D) to 16-31(E), the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S. Slide at the same time. The lower area 006SG005B, which has slid to the left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, further slides downward, and the upper area 006SG005T, which has slid to the right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, further slides upward. . At this time, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is moved and displayed on both the boundary on the lower region 006SG005B side and the boundary on the upper region 006SG005T side so as to follow.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 16-31(E) and 16-31(F), in the display area of the image display device 5, the lower area 006SG005B slides downward and the upper area 006SG005T slides upward. The display of a black image starts. The display area of the black image expands as the lower area 006SG005B slides downward and the upper area 006SG005T slides upward, and the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T move outside the display area. By completing the movement, the display area enters a so-called blackout state in which only the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are displayed.

Thereafter, when the blackout ends, display of a new background image and decorative pattern is started in the display area of the image display device 5. It should be noted that this pre-read preview performance is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the external pre-read target starts.

In addition, as for the pre-read preview effect in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 16-32(A) to 16-32(F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has the first reserved memory. A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, a cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the drawing area. Furthermore, the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-3 includes a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing images in a lower layer than the layer 3 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing images in a lower layer. It is located. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a black image (blackout image) is drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image including the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T is created.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area, and the layer 5 A display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

As described above, in this modified example 006SG-3, in the pre-read preview performance as a specific performance in the present invention, as shown in FIGS. 16-31(C) and 16-31(D), the upper area 006SG005T and the lower The decorative pattern and the background image are displayed across the area 006SG005B, and the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left, and the border between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B moves. Since the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed, it is possible to more effectively make the player recognize the left and right movement of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B as the pre-read preview effect, and increase the interest in the game. can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figure 16-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern or background image, so the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area Since the display position of the cutting effect image 006SG005S does not change even if the display position with the area 006SG005B changes, the display position of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B can be changed by comparing the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B with the cutting effect image 006SG005S. The displacement can be made more conspicuous, and the performance effect of the pre-read preview performance can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 16-31(D) and 16-31(E), after moving the upper region 006SG005T toward the right side and the lower region 006SG005B toward the left side, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region By moving the boundary portions with 006SG005B upward and downward, respectively, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect of the preview preview performance and improve the interest of the performance. In particular, as a look-ahead preview effect, as shown in Figures 16-31(D) and 16-31(E), the upper area 006SG005T moves towards the right side, the lower area 006SG005B moves towards the left side, but the upper area 006SG005T moves towards the left side. Since the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction, the synergistic effect of the displacement (movement) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B and the displacement (movement) of the boundary can further enhance the performance effect of the pre-read preview performance. I can do it.

In this modification 006SG-3, the moving direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is a vertical direction that is different from the right side, which is the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T, and the left side, which is the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the moving direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same as the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T and the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. It is sufficient if it is different from either one of them.

In this modification 006SG-3, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 as a pre-read preview effect, and the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T divided along the cutting effect image 006SG005S are moved and displayed. Although the present invention is not limited to this, a plurality of display modes of the cutting effect image 006SG005S are provided, and a variable display of the pre-read target is provided depending on which display mode the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed. The rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot may be varied.

For example, as shown in Figure 16-33, three types of display colors, blue, green, and red, are provided as the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and when the variable display result of the prefetch target is a jackpot, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed. It is displayed in blue at a rate of 10%, displayed in green at a rate of 30%, and displayed in red at a rate of 60%. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the prefetch target is incorrect, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue at a rate of 60%, green at a rate of 30%, and red at a rate of 10%. Bye.

By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S displayed during the pre-reading preview performance, so that the performance effect of the pre-reading preview performance can be further enhanced.

In this modified example 006SG-3, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is provided with three types of display colors, blue, green, and red. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cutting effect image 006SG005S The display colors of the image 006SG005S may be two colors or four or more colors. Furthermore, the ratio at which the variable display result of the prefetch target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) may be varied depending on aspects other than color, such as the shape and size of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, the number of displayed cutting effect images 006SG005S, etc. .

Further, in the present modification example 006SG-3, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is divided into two areas along the cutting effect image 006SG005S as a pre-read preview effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be divided into three or more areas as a pre-read preview effect. In this case, the performance effect of the pre-read preview performance may be improved by varying the direction in which each area slides.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-3, a form in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved respectively is exemplified as a pre-read preview effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-read preview effect The region to be moved may be only one of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, and the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the left side The image is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to. Therefore, even if the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B are different, so the pre-read preview effect is This can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left At least a portion may be common to the image. By doing so, it is possible to add surprise to the pre-read preview performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 16-31(C) and 16-31(D), the upper area in the display area of the image display device 5 is The image displayed across 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is the same as the image displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left as a pre-read preview effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at a timing before the execution of the pre-read preview effect. A part of the image may not be displayed as an image that is displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a pre-read preview effect. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance interest of the pre-read preview performance.

In this modified example 006SG-3, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a preview effect (in FIG. 16-31(D), the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the right side). When the upper region 006SG005T is moved upward and the lower region 006SG005B is moved downward in FIG. 16-31(E), the amount of movement (displacement amount) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same. It is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a preview effect, the amount of movement (displacement amount ) may be different. In this way, by varying the amount of movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, which move in opposite directions as a pre-read preview effect, the performance effect of the pre-read preview effect can be further improved.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in FIG. 16-33, a mode is exemplified in which the ratio of the variable display result of the prefetch target to the jackpot is varied depending on the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, but the present invention However, the display color of the cut effect image 006SG005S may be changeable each time the variable display is executed, as shown in FIG. 16-34 as a modification 006SG-4. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result of the prefetch target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) may vary depending on the display color of the final cutting effect image 006SG005S or the display color change pattern.

Furthermore, in the feature section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIG. 16-35 as modification example 006SG-5, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, during the variable display, there is a non-probable variable jackpot or a 2-round definite variable with a small number of rounds. A combination of decorative patterns in which decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates the type of jackpot, such as a jackpot, and then the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot, and then they finally stop. You may perform a promotion performance (also referred to as a re-lottery performance) that notifies you of the jackpot type.

The performance mode of the promotion performance will be explained based on FIG. 16-35. First, after announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot as a normal reach or super reach reach effect, as shown in Figure 16-35 (A), after these reach effects are finished, the decorative symbols are displayed as a non-probable variable jackpot or a 2-round guaranteed variable. A combination indicating a jackpot type that is relatively less advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot (in the example shown in FIG. 16-35(A), a combination of even numbers "2" indicating a non-probable variable jackpot) is displayed.

Then, as shown in Figure 16-35 (B), during the remaining period of the variable display, the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are displayed as promotion effects such as a 2-round probability-variable jackpot, a 5-round probability-variable jackpot, a 10-round probability-variable jackpot, etc. The combinations of decorative symbols of other jackpot types are variably displayed at a constant speed.

During execution of the promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 16-35(C) and 16-35(D), the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is directed leftward in two steps. It gets distorted.

Then, the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot type indicated by the initially displayed combination of decorative symbols (see Figure 16-35 (A)). In some cases, after the first or second stage distortion of the promotion performance, the decorative pattern stops at the combination of the corresponding jackpot type (in the example shown in FIG. 16-35(E), the combination of probability-variable jackpot). On the other hand, if the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is the same as the jackpot type indicated by the initially displayed combination of decorative symbols, the decorative symbol will be displayed after the first stage of distortion of the promotion effect. It stops at a combination of jackpot types (in the example shown in FIG. 16-35(F), a non-probable jackpot combination).

In addition, the "advantage for the player" between the jackpot types in this modification 006SG-5 refers to whether or not the game is controlled to a variable probability state after the jackpot game ends, or whether it is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends. Refers to games with a different number of variable displays and games with a different number of rounds in a jackpot game.

In addition, as a promotion effect in this modified example 006SG-5, as shown in FIGS. 16-36 (A) to 16-36 (E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first reserved memory display. A first interface image 006SG005I including area 006SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. The background image is drawn.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image is created in which the center portion in the vertical direction is distorted toward the left side.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area are superimposed and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image is now created.

Note that the display image displayed on the image display device 5 in this modified example 006SG-5 is an image that is longer than the display area of the image display device 5 in the left-right width direction and the top-bottom width direction, as in the characteristic portion 006SG. (See FIGS. 16-19). However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 16-37, the horizontal width dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is It may be the same as the dimension in the left and right width direction of the display area of the display device 5.

In this case, when the promotion effect is executed as described above, as shown in FIGS. When the central portion is distorted to the left, an image non-display area where no image is displayed is formed on the right side of the display area.

Therefore, in the case where the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. As shown in Figures 16-39 (A) to 16-39 (D), when performing promotion effects, the decorative designs drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the decorative patterns drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are By enlarging the placed background image or enlarging the displacement target image (background image and decorative pattern) created in the displacement image creation area, a part of the background image can be moved outside the display area of the image display device 5. Deploy. In this way, by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, even if the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted to the left as a promotion effect, the right side of the image display device 5 As a result of being enlarged, a background image placed outside the display area of the image display device 5 will be displayed, which may cause inappropriate image display on the image display device 5, such as the formation of the above-mentioned image non-display area. It is possible to reduce the possibility that an inappropriate display will occur.

In addition, in FIG. 16-39, when the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted to the left as a promotion effect, an image non-display area where no image is displayed on the right side of the display area is shown. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which both the background image and the decorative pattern are enlarged in order to prevent the formation of image non-display areas, the present invention is not limited to this. In order to prevent this, only the background image may be enlarged.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, when performing the promotion effect, the displacement image is applied to the entire displacement target image enlarged so that the left and right width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which an image for promotion effect is created by applying the image, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to displace only the portion corresponding to the area, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-5, the promotion effect is executed when the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display area of the image display device 5. When doing so, an image non-display area is formed during execution of the promotion effect by enlarging the decorative pattern drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the present invention is not limited to this. The enlargement of the background image may be performed in stages according to the progress of the promotion effect (according to an increase in the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort caused by the sudden enlarged display of decorative patterns and background images on the image display device 5. Therefore, while maintaining the promotion effect, the display area of the image display device 5 can be reduced. In the process of increasing the distortion of the displayed image, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display such as display of an image non-display area on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the feature section 006SG, a form is exemplified in which a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of the super reach reach effect can be executed during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, it is possible to perform a pseudo continuous performance including temporary stoppage and re-variable display of decorative symbols, and the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled (jackpot expectation level) may be varied depending on the number of executions of the pseudo continuous performance. .

In particular, in a variable display that executes such a pseudo-continuous effect, there is a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the decorative pattern will temporarily stop immediately before the temporary stop timing of the decorative pattern, or a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the decorative pattern will temporarily stop when the decorative pattern temporarily stops. It may also be possible to perform a temporary stop notification effect to notify temporary stop of the decorative pattern.

In addition, in the present modification example 006SG-5, when executing the promotion effect, by enlarging the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5, the display image can also be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the image non-display area is prevented from being formed during execution of the promotion effect by arranging a part of the image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image is previously promoted in the CGROM 205. Store an image that is larger in size than the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of this modification 006SG-5, at least the left and right width dimensions are longer than the left and right width dimensions of the display area of the image display device 5) as an image for presentation. Then, by drawing and arranging the image in the displacement image creation area or the display image creation area, it may be possible to prevent the image non-display portion from being formed during execution of the promotion effect.

Furthermore, in this modified example 006SG-5, when executing the promotion effect, by enlarging the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5, the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the image non-display area is prevented from being formed during execution of promotion effect by arranging a part of the image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, in the display image creation area, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 at a position outside the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of this modification 006SG-5, on the right outer side of the display area of the image display device 5). An image (non-display image) different from the displayed image (display image) may be placed adjacent to the displayed image. By doing so, when the promotion effect is executed, the display image and the non-display image are arranged adjacent to each other across the display area and non-display area of the image display device 5, so that the image is replaced with the non-display area. A part of the hidden image will be displayed.

In the feature section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 16-40 to 16-42 as modified example 006SG-6, these temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects are used as effects to displace the image displayed on the image display device 5. May be executed.

The performance mode of the temporary stop suggestion performance will be explained based on FIG. 16-40. First, as shown in FIG. 16-40(A), when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, the left and right decorative symbols stop (swinging stops) and become a reach. Thereafter, as a temporary stop suggestion effect, a pseudo-continuous pattern (a pattern displayed as "NEXT"), which is a part of the decorative pattern, moves from the top to the bottom. At this time, on the image display device 5, the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed so as to converge from the periphery of the display area toward the center of the display area, and the images surrounding the ripple effect image 006SG005P ( The left and right decorative patterns and background images are displayed distorted.

If the variable display is a variable display that performs a pseudo-continuous performance (a variable display in which the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop), as shown in FIG. 16-40 (B), the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop and , a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display that does not perform a pseudo-continuous effect (a variable display in which the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop), the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as is, as shown in Figure 16-40 (C). It moves to the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5 and disappears from display, and a symbol indicating that the variable display result is a failure is displayed as a decorative symbol inside.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-6, as shown in FIG. 16-40, by displaying the ripple effect image 006SG005P on the image display device 5, a form that suggests that the decorative pattern (pseudo continuous pattern) is temporarily stopped is provided. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the ripple effect image 006SG005P are provided, and it is determined in which display mode the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo-association suggestion effect. Accordingly, the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo continuous pattern) temporarily stops may be varied.

For example, in FIG. 16-40, two ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed (double display) as a pseudo-association suggestion effect, but as shown in FIG. 16-41, ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed as a pseudo-association suggestion effect. It is sufficient to provide a case where only one is displayed, and to vary the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo continuous pattern) temporarily stops depending on the number of ripple effect images 006SG005P displayed in the pseudo continuous effect.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-6, the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed as a part of the decorative pattern, that is, the pseudo continuous pattern is a pattern that is displayed as part of the variable display even in periods other than the pseudo continuous performance. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the pseudo-continuous pattern may be a pattern different from the decorative pattern, and may be a special pattern that is displayed only during the pseudo-continuous performance.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 16-42(A) and 16-42(B), the temporary stop notification effect is such that the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed after the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. The ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed so as to be diffused from the center of the display area to the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5, and images around the ripple effect image 006SG005P (left and right decorative patterns and background images) are distorted. Is displayed.

The temporary stop suggestion effect and temporary stop notification effect in this modified example 006SG-6 are as shown in Figures 16-43 (A) to 16-43 (F), in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area. , a first interface image 006SG005I including a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and a ripple effect image 006SG005P is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. A decorative pattern including a pseudo continuous pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-6. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created using the image drawn in the layer 3 image rendering area, and a displacement image (ripples) is created by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image. A distorted decorative pattern and background image) are created using the effect image 006SG005P.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

In addition, in the feature section 006GS, a mode in which the effect image is displayed using the image display device 5 capable of displaying only a two-dimensional image has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the modification 006SG- As shown in FIG. 16-44 and FIG. 16-45 as 7, the effect image may be displayed using a display device capable of displaying a stereoscopic image.

Modified example 006SG-7 will be explained below. Note that in the above-described characteristic part 006SG and the modified examples, the image display device 5 is a display device such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) capable of displaying a two-dimensional image (2D image). However, in this modified example 006SG-7, as shown in FIG. 16-44, an autostereoscopic image display device 5 that allows a player to view a stereoscopic image with the naked eye by a parallax barrier method is used. The feature is that by using ', stereoscopic images (3D images) can be displayed in addition to monoscopic images (2D images) as various images.

As shown in FIG. 16-44, the autostereoscopic image display device 5' of this modified example 006SG-7 is a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of a right eye image (R image) and a left eye image (L image). an image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 capable of displaying images, a backlight 006SG901 that emits planar light from the back to the front of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and an image liquid crystal panel on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900. 006SG900 and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 provided at a predetermined interval.

The parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 allows the player's left eye to visually recognize the right eye image (R image) displayed in a vertical strip shape on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and the left eye image (L image) to be viewed by the player's right eye. The player has a vertically striped black part that acts as a shutter to prevent the player from viewing the image, and a transparent part that allows the right eye image to be seen by the player's right eye and the left eye image to be seen by the player's left eye. A relatively highly optically transparent liquid crystal capable of displaying a parallax barrier image in a parallax barrier image display state and a transmissive display state in which all pixels are transparent without vertical striped black areas. It is considered a panel.

Note that the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 displays, for example, a right eye image (R image) instead of the left eye image (L image), and the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 does not display the above-mentioned parallax barrier image ( By using a fully transparent display), a two-dimensional image (2D image) can also be displayed.

In other words, the autostereoscopic image display device 5', which is the display means of the present modification 006SG-7, is composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in addition to a monoscopic image (2D image) that is a non-stereoscopic image. It is possible to display autostereoscopic images.

Note that the stereoscopic image consisting of the right-eye image and the left-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 is also drawn in the above-mentioned layers like the monoscopic image (2D image), while the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel The parallax barrier image displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is drawn on a dedicated layer provided exclusively for the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 and displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910.

When displaying an effect image using such an autostereoscopic image display device 5', other effects may be stereoscopically displayed at a timing different from the specific effect (for example, development suggestion effect) in the present invention during variable display. It may also be possible to perform this by displaying a visual image (3D image).

As shown in FIG. 16-45 (A) to FIG. 16-45 (D), during variable display, the autostereoscopic image display device 5' has an image that moves upward, which is a displacement specific image, as described above. It is possible to perform a development suggestion performance, which is a specific performance in which images of the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R that have been moved, and an image of the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward, can be executed, and the development suggestion performance has a different execution period. A variable display preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot is executed as a non-overlapping preview performance, and a stereoscopic image is displayed in the variable display preview performance.

In other words, a development suggestion effect is executed, which is a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R that have moved upward, which are displacement specific images, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward are displayed. In this case, only a monoscopic image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, is displayed, and a stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed.

When the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R that have moved upward, which are displacement specific images, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward are displayed in this way, the display is displayed in a non-stereoscopic manner. By using a two-dimensional image (2D image) as an image, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the displacement is due to a stereoscopic image, which reduces the interest of the performance. It can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the effects of displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) and the images of the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R that have moved upward, which are displacement specific images, and the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward Since the execution period of the image is different from the development suggestion performance, which is a specific performance that is displayed, the display of stereoscopic images (3D images) is restricted based on the execution period of the performance. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when displaying a displacement specific image and a stereoscopic image (3D image) during the same performance, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed while the displacement specific image is displayed. In order to prevent the displacement specific image from being displayed, data such as a display flag that can identify that a displacement specific image is being displayed is stored, and based on this data, a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed. The display may be restricted. In addition, regarding these restrictions, in order to prevent stereoscopic images (3D images) from being displayed immediately after or just before the display of the displacement specific image ends, there are certain restrictions before and after the period in which the displacement specific image is displayed. Also during the period, display of stereoscopic images (3D images) may be restricted by storing data such as a display flag.

In addition, although the above-mentioned modification 006SG-7 exemplifies a parallax barrier type autostereoscopic image display device 5' using the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed using an autostereoscopic image display device using a lenticular lens method or an integral imaging method other than the parallax barrier method.

In addition, although this modified example 006SG0-7 exemplifies a form in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed in the development suggestion performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and stereoscopic vision is also displayed in the development suggestion performance. There may also be a case where an image (3D image) is displayed. In addition, when displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) in the exhibition presentation, the images (right eye image and left eye image) of the stereoscopic image (3D image) are drawn and the monoscopic image (2D image) is It is sufficient to draw and arrange the image in an image drawing area (for example, layer 1 image drawing area) higher than the image drawing area to be placed. By doing this, the stereoscopic image (3D image) will be displayed with priority over the monoscopic image (2D image), so the stereoscopic image (3D image) will be suitably displayed in the development suggestion performance. can do.

In addition, in this modification example 006SG-7, as a performance for displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image), a variable display preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot is different from the development suggestion performance (specific performance). Although the embodiment has been exemplified in a form that can be executed during the period, the present invention is not limited to this. A stereoscopic image (3D image) may also be displayed. By doing this, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that the development suggestion performance (specific performance) will be executed by displaying the stereoscopic image (3D image), so the development suggestion performance (specific performance) The production effect can be further improved. Furthermore, a plurality of presentation modes are provided for the introduction presentation and development suggestion presentation (specific presentation), and the presentation presentation for the development suggestion presentation (specific presentation) is determined depending on which presentation presentation mode the introduction presentation is performed. It may be different.

Furthermore, in the introduction performance, the movable body 32 is operated, and the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) are linked to produce the performance effects of the introduction performance and the development suggestion performance (specific performance). may be improved.

Further, in the feature section 006SG, an example is given in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

In addition, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine, as shown in FIG. 16-46 as a modified example 006SG-8, the game-related information in the present invention (the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface in the feature section 006SG) (corresponding to image 006SG005J), a medal payout display, an AT (assist time) remaining game number display, a medal display stored as credits, etc. are displayed on the image display device 5 along with the performance image, and these game-related information are displayed. It is sufficient to use an image that is not subject to displacement.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modification example, as a specific effect of the present invention, a form of effect that changes or distorts (distorts) the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified, but The present invention is not limited to this, and as the specific effect, the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed or distorted repeatedly.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modification example, the development suggestion performance, the reach suggestion performance, the revival performance, the advance notice performance, the promotion performance, the temporary stop suggestion performance, and the temporary stop notification performance are exemplified as specific performances in the present invention, A plurality of performances may be possible as these specific performances. In addition, in the case where a plurality of specific effects can be executed in this way, for example, in the normal state, it is possible to execute an effect in which decorative patterns (characters and numbers) are not separated, such as a development suggestion effect, in the normal state. On the other hand, a performance in which a decorative pattern (numbers only) is divided into a plurality of pieces or display areas may be performed, such as a revival performance or a look-ahead preview performance. By doing this, in the normal state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of a specific performance due to the fact that the decorative patterns containing characters and numbers are not separated, and in the time-saving state, on the contrary, the decorative patterns containing only numbers can be prevented. By dividing, the performance effect of a specific performance can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 006SG, the decorative pattern is composed of characters and numbers in the normal state, and the decorative pattern is composed of only numbers in the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed from the middle of the variable display in a specific variation pattern such as the variable display in the super reach variation pattern. For example, in the variable display of super reach, a decorative pattern consisting of characters and numbers is displayed variablely during the period from the start of the variable display until reach, and after reach, a decorative pattern consisting only of numbers is displayed. All you have to do is display the variable. Furthermore, in the period after the reach, as a specific performance in the present invention, a performance in which decorative symbols are divided, such as a resurrection performance, may be made possible.

Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 006SG and each modification example, an example is given in which an image in which at least a part of the specific image according to the present invention is displaced in the horizontal direction or vertical direction is displayed on the image display device 5 as a displacement specific image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image in which at least a portion of the specific image is enlarged or reduced may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a displacement specific image. That is, the image displacement direction in the present invention may include the enlargement/reduction direction (Z-axis direction) in addition to the left-right direction (X-axis direction) and the up-down direction (Y-axis direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-3 and 16-4, in the displacement target image, from the position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image, the Although the form of generating a displacement image using a replacement method in which a pixel X is identified and the pixel X is displaced (replaced) to a position corresponding to a pixel A of a displacement image has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, in a displacement target image, a displacement image is created using a method (moving method) in which pixel X at a position corresponding to pixel A of the displacement image is moved to a position according to the R value and G value of the pixel A. may be generated. In addition, in the replacement method, as in Modified Example 006SG-3, it is necessary to edit the displacement image of the area close to the boundary into a displacement image that takes into account the width of the boundary between areas with different moving directions. On the other hand, in the case of the replacement method, there is no need to perform these edits, so it is possible to reduce the video creation load, and when placing an effect image etc. at the boundary, it is necessary to set the boundary where the effect image is placed. Since the degree of freedom can be increased, the burden of creating video including effect images can be reduced.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means having a display area capable of displaying an image and capable of displaying a display image of game-related information regarding the progress of the game in the display area;
a storage means capable of storing image data including at least a specific image displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means having a plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers; ,
a variable winning means that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
a control means capable of executing a round game that changes the variable winning means to the first state;
Equipped with
The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area,
The display means is
A background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area,
In the second display area, an amount display regarding the amount of the gaming value provided can be displayed on the front side of the background image,
At least in the first display area, a notification display is displayed on the front side of the background image to notify that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a predetermined amount. A first notification display notifying that the amount of game value awarded has reached a second predetermined amount can be displayed;
The notification display can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area,
The award amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state,
The notification display ends displaying when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display,
The characters used for the notification display are larger in size than the characters used for the provision amount display,
The characters used for the provision amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed,
The specific character used to display the amount of application is such that the background image is not visible from the specific area,
The specific characters used for the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area,
The display means is
When the round game is played, displaying the award amount display after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state;
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that no gaming value has been awarded can be displayed at the start of the award amount display;
If the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a special display different from the predetermined display can be displayed at the start of the award amount display;
The predetermined period is a period that is less than or equal to the period from when a game medium is fired until the next game medium is fired;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images